METHODS OF CHEMICAL ANALYSIS FOR OIL SHALE WASTES
                           '  by

      John R.  Wallace,  Linda  Alden,  Francis  S.  Bonomo,
              John Nichols  and  Elizabeth  Sexton
                   Charles  H.  Prien Center
                 for  Synthetic Fuel Studies
                 Denver Research Institute
                   University of Denver
                  Denver, Colorado  80208
                       Contract No.
                        68-03-2791
                       October, 1982
           EPA Project Monitor:   Robert Thurnau
       Industrial Environmental  Research Laboratory
                     Cincinnati, Ohio
                       Prepared for

           U.S.  ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
             Office of Research & Development
                  Washington, D.C.   20460

-------
                                  DISCLAIMER







     This  report  has  been reviewed by  the  Industrial  Environmental Research



Laboratory, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, and approved for publication.



Approval does  not  signify that the contents necessarily reflect the views and



policies of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, nor does mention of trade



names or commercial products constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

-------
                                   ABSTRACT







     This  report  describes  methods of chemical  analysis which are necessary in



order  to  adequately test the various pollution control technologies which are



presently  being proposed for  the treatment  of oil shale retort  gases  and



wastewaters.   It  includes  step-by-step  protocols for  determining important



species and it provides supporting evidence and discussion to allow the analyst



to  adjust the procedure to the  varied  sample types which he may  encounter.



Emphasis  is placed  on methods which are  sufficiently  rugged and rapid to be



useful on site during the field testing of pollution control systems.



     A type of ion  exchange chromatography,  referred  to  in  the literature as



suppressed ion  chromatography,  has been applied for the determination  of major



and minor  anions  in retort wastewaters.  Original experience with this method



for retort wastewaters  indicated the' presence  of  very late-eluting compounds



which could not be removed from the column in a reasonable time and which would



interfere  with subsequent analyses.  This  problem was solved with  a  column



switching  arrangement which allows  the late eluters  to be separated on  a



pre-column while  the earlier-eluting compounds are separated  on the main



analytical column.   The  same  valve and column  configuration  can  be used for



four different protocols:   the  first  protocol,  referred  to as the majors



protocol,  determines SOI,  N°i>  S20i,  and SCN~ in a single  run using 7  mM



Na2C03  as an  eluent.  The second protocol  determines  the  late  eluters,



S20f and  SCN~ using  an  eluent of 7 mM NaC03 + 0.5 mg/1 of SCtt".   Earlier



eluters are determined  by  the third protocol using a valve switching arrange-



ment which  traps  the  late  eluters on  a pre-column, which  is  periodically



flushed to  waste.   Peaks which  can  be  observed with this procedure include



Cl~, acetate,  N02,  SOf,  NOi,  P0|~ and SOJ,  although not all  have  been  success-



fully  separated when present  in the same solution.   While  the valving  and



                                      II

-------
 column  configuration remain unchanged, the analysts must be prepared to adjust



 the  eluent for  the  various types of samples and  analytes  encountered.   The



 fourth  protocol  is for the measurement  of total  sulfur and is carried out by



 oxidizing  the  various sulfur species present to SOI, which is then determined



 by the  protocol  for  the early eluters.



     The determination  of sulfide by potentiometric titration with Pb(II) has



 been  investigated  for retort wastewaters.  Thipcyanate, thiosulfate, sulfate,



 chloride,  carbonate, ammonia,  and  hydroxide ions,  which  are components of



 retort  waters,  have  been tested as  potential  interferences  for sulfide concen-



 tration  in the  range 1-1,000 mg/1  and have been  shown to  be insignificant



 within  the normal  range of interest.  The titration has been evaluated under



 field conditions with actual  retort waters with regard to precision,  recovery,



 reliability, and ease of use.   The titration procedure has also been compared



 to the  direct  calibration method with the AgS  ion selective electrode.  The



 titration  procedure,  which  includes an AgS ion selective electrode to monitor



 the titration and a Gran's ploferid point, is the preferred method of analysis.



     Thermal evaporation,  lyopholization,  and  the measurement of  colligative



properties have  been investigated as measurements of the total solute content



 in retort  wastewaters.   Of  these, both thermal  evaporation and lyopholization



were  shown to  be  inappropriate.   Of the various colligative properties



considered, the  freezing  point  depression  was shown  to  be the best measurement



of total dissolved solutes.   Using  this  method  the total solute content  can  be



measured in units of moles/liter over the range  0.001 - 3.0  moles/liter (count-



 ing each ion separately).



     Three distinct  methods have  been developed for  the analysis of ammoniacal



N in retort waters.   The first method uses an  ammonia selective electrode but
                                      III

-------
minimizes  many of the problems associated with this device by maintaining the



electrode  in  pure standard to which  small  amounts of sample are added.  The



second  method,  ion chromatography, separates NH4+  on  an ion exchange column



with  detection  by electrical  conductivity.   The  third  method involves



absorption  of UV radiation by ammonia  in the headspace over a  basic sample



solution.   All  three  methods  are capable  of quantitating ammoniacal.  N in



turbid,  briny,  and organic-laden wastewaters but are distinguished by several



secondary  characteristics.   For  example, the first method  requires  the least



investment  in equipment but is the most  labor intensive and least precise.  The



ion chromatographic method is  readily implemented with commercially available



equipment  and  also is capable of measuring Na  and K simultaneously.   The gas



absorption  method  is  promising as the basis for an on-line,  unattended monitor



and is  capable  of distinguishing between aqueous  NH3  and NH4+.   It  is the most



precise  measurement but requires spectral background  correction in  order to



achieve accurate results.



     A  method  for  measuring total  sulfur in oil  shale  retort  gas is  described.



The method  operates by converting the various sulfur  species to S02  which  is



then monitored by a commercially available monitor.  Two devices, a heated tube



and a flame,  have been evaluated for converting the various individual sulfur



species to  S02.   Of  these, the conversion efficiency in the tube was shown to



depend  both on the temperature  and  the species being oxidized,  undesirable



performance for this  purpose.  The flame was  shown  to  convert essentially 100%



of the  various  sulfur species  to  S02-   Based  on this performance, a  device was



constructed for the measurement  of total  sulfur in  retort gas and tested at an



oil shale  retort.  The total  sulfur measured with  the flame converter agreed



within experimental error with the sum of the  individual  sulfur  species.
                                      IV

-------
      Gas  chromatography with flame  photometric  detection was developed as  a



 means of measuring sulfur species  in  retort gas.  Two potential problems were



 considered  in detail  in  order  to establish the veracity of this  technique:



 First,  hydrocarbons,  one of the  major components  of retort gas, are known to



 quench  the  fluorescence of the flame  photometric  detector (FPD),  and  it was



 necessary to  determine  whether this  would be a problem in realistic retort gas.



 The second potential problem was  the large number of sulfur  species which could



 occur in retort gas.   Without  prior knowledge one can  easily  number twenty



 possible gases,  which  thus must be separated from each other if an unambiguous



 assignment is to be made to each.



      Fluorescent quenching  effects were measured on two  types of commercially



 available FPD's, a single-flame detector and a dual-flame detector.  The latter



 exhibited no  significant quenching  effects over the  concentration ranges of



 interest in  retort gas.   However,  for the  single  flame detector  quenching



 effects cannot be  ruled out entirely.   Although  hydrogen sulfide in  retort  gas



 is usually abundant  enough to minimize quenching effects,  the  minor species



 could be  subject to quenching  effects unless  precautions are taken.   These



 precautions include  operating the  detector  with  the air and hydrogen  flows



 reversed and measuring peak height rather than peak area.  In addition,  columns



 are selected  that  minimize  co-elution with  hydrocarbons!  The  single  flame



detector exhibited  both suppression and enhancement of the fluorescent signal.



     Because  of  the  large number of sulfur  species which could conceivably



occur in retort  gas,  it became  apparent that a single packed column  could not



 unambiguously  separate  all possible species.   Efforts were therefore made to



 find  a column which would  separate the compounds of primary  interest—hydrogen



 sulfide, carbonyl sulfide,  sulfur dioxide, carbon disulfide, methyl mercaptan,



and ethyl mercaptan—from  each  other as well  as  from the later  eluting  sulfur
                                       V

-------
compounds.   Several  columns were  evaluated  with regard to their  ability  to


achieve this  separation  as well as the required separation from hydrocarbons.


Columns were  also  tested for their ability to tolerate water vapor as well as


the other compounds in retort gas.  The best general purpose column packing for


the determination  of  the sulfur compounds of primary interest was a Carbopack


B HT 100, although a  Chromosil  310 packing would be useful  for  the occassional


determination of  thiophenes.    A  protocol  for the primary sulfur  species  is


described for the concentration  range of 5-50,000  ppmv  using  a  Carbopack


B HT 100 column arranged in a backflush-to-detector configuration.


     Electrical  conductivity, pH, alkalinity, and total inorganic carbon, while


not investigated  explicitly in  this  study,   are  discussed briefly.   It  is


suggested that  the measurement  of pH and electrical  conductivity with the


standard conductivity cell  and  pH electrode,  respectively,  has  demonstrated no


obvious problems,  although frequent  cleaning and calibration should .be ex-


pected.   It  is  recommended  that the  alkalinity  test be discontinued  as  a


measurement  of  dissolved  carbon dioxide  because  of interferences  due to


ammonia and organic acids.   Dissolved carbon dioxide should instead be deter-


mined by  commercially available analyzers which are  also  suitable for total
   s,

organic carbon measurements.  Precautions for the latter two measurements are


discussed in the text.
                                      VI

-------
                               TABLE OF CONTENTS
Disclaimer. .	     I
Abstract	    II
Table of Contents	   VII
List of Figures	     X
List of Tables.  .  '	XIII
Acknowledgement	.	   XIV
   1.  Introduction	1-1
       References	1-3
   2.  Minor Anions in Retort Wastewater by Ion Chromatography.  .  .  .  .  2-1
       Experimental	2-5
       Results and Discussion	2-10
       Protocol  for Major Anions Analysis 	  2-28
           Principle.	2-28
           Equipment	2-30
           Reagents	2-31
           Procedure	  2-32
           Interferences	  2-33
       Protocol  for Thiosulfate and Thiocyanate ....	  2-34
           Principle	2-34
           Equipment	.  .  2-34
           Reagents	  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  2-35
           Procedure	2-36
       Protocol  for Early Eluting Species 	  2-37
           Principle	2-37
           Equipment.  .  .  	 .........  2-37
           Reagents	  2-38
           Procedure	2-39
           Interferences,	2-40
       Protocol  for Total  Sulfur	  2-40
           Principle	  2-40
           Equipment	2-41
           Reagents	2-41
           Sample  Pre-treatment 	  ...  2-41
           Procedure	  .  2-43
       References	2-43
   3.   The Determination of Sulfide in Oil  Shale Wastewaters	3-1
       Experimental  Section	3-4
       Results and Discussion	3-6
       Conclusions	   3-15
       Recommended Method for Total  Sulfide in Retort Wastewaters  .  .  .   3-16
           Principle	3-16
           Reagents	3-16
           Equipment	3-17
           Procedure	3-18
           Recording Data	3-20
           Calculations  	   3-20
           Instructions  for Gran's Plot Program 	   3-21
       References	3-25
       Appendix  3A
       Statistical Interpretation 	   3-26


                                      VII

-------
4.  Total Solutes in Retort Wastewaters	4-1
    Experimental Section	4-2
    Results and Conclusions	4-3
    Acknowledgements	 .  4-7
    Recommended Method for Total Solutes in Retort Water 	  4-7
        Principle	4-7
        Comment	4-7
        Applicability	4-8
        Reagents	4-8
        Procedure	.  4-9
        Data Reporting .  .  .  .	4-10
    References	4-10
5.  Total Ammoniacal Nitrogen in Retort Wastewaters. 	  5-1
    Experimental Section 	  5-5
        Sample Addition Technique	5-5
        Ion Chromatography	5-6
    Results and Discussion	5-9
        Sample Addition Method 	  5-9
        Ion Chromatography	5-12
        Gas Absorption Method	  5-15
        Comparison of Methods	 .  5-25
    Protocol for Total Ammoniacal N by Ion Chromatography	  5-30
        Principle.  .	5-30
        Comments	5-30
        Reagents and Supplies.  .....  	  5-30
        Apparatus	5-32
        Procedures	 '	5-32
    Protocol for Total Ammoniacal N by Modified Electrode Method . .  5-33
        Principle	  .  .	5-33
        Comments	5-33
        Reagents and Supplies	  5-33
        Apparatus	  5-34
        Procedures	  5-34
    References	5-36
6.  Total Sulfur in Retort Gas	6-1
    Experimental 	  .....  6-4
    Results and Discussions	6-5
    Appendix 6A
    Derivation of the Calibration Form for S Analyzer	6-23
    Appendix 6B
    Calibration of the Mass Flow Meter	  6-28
7.  Sulfur Species in Retort Gas .  .  .	7-1
    Experimental	7-7
        Reagents	7-7
        Column Packing Process	  7-8
        Equipment	7-9
        Preparation of Gas Standards	7-10
        Procedure for Measuring Signal  Quenching	  7-11
        Procedure for Measuring Retention Times.  .  	  7-12
        Procedure for Measuring Actual  Retort Gas.  . .	7-12
                                  VIII

-------
7.  Sulfur Species in Retort Gas (cont.)
    Results and Discussion		 .   7-13
        Flame Stability	7-13
        Fluorescence Quenching 	   7-17
        Uniformity of Response 	   7-32
        Column Characterization	7-33
        Application to Retort Gas	7-52
    Protocol for Determination of Hydrogen Sulfide,
    Carbonyl Sulfide, Sulfur Dioxide, Carbon Disulfide,
    Methyl Mercaptan, and Ethyl Mercaptan in Retort Gas	   7-63
        Principle	7-63
        Interferences	7-63
        Equipment.  .  .'	•  • •   7-64
        Standards	7-67
        Procedure	'.   7-68
    References	7-68
8.  Concluding Remarks 	   8-1
    References	8-12
                                   IX

-------
                              LIST OF FIGURES
                                                                          Page
 Figure 2-1.   Ion chromatograph valve and column configuration.  	  2-8
 Figure 2-2.   Ion chromatograph of S203= and SCN~ in retort waters.  .  .  .  2-13
 Figure 2-3.   Variation of adjusted retention time with eluent
              strength.	2-15
 Figure 2-4.   Adjusted retention times for three eluents	2-16
 Figure 2-5.   Ion chromatogram of a retort wastewater using the
              majors  protocol  	  .....  2-19
 Figure 2-6.   Calibration curves obtained with the majors  protocol
              for N03~, S04 ,  S203  and SCN~	2-21.
 Figure 2-7.   Calibration curves obtained with the protocol  for  late
              eluting compounds	2-22
 Figure 2-8.   Ion chromatograms of standards obtained using the
              early eluter protocol	2-24
 Figure 2-9.   Adjusted retention times for seven ions with
              standard eluent  (2.4 mM CO-" + 3.0 mM HC00~).  .  ...  .  .  .  2-27
                                        O              O
 Figure 2-10.  Calibration curves for the early eluters.  .  .	  2-42
 Figure 5-1.   Sample  cell  for  measuring  the uv absorption
              of  gaseous  NH3 over a  liquid sample	5-8
 Figure 5-2.   Ion  chromatograms  of Na+,  NH4+ and K+ .	5-13
 Figure 5-3.   Effect  of cell temperature on  response.
              (Standard concentration  =  100  mg/1  NH,,
              absorption  wavelength  =  197.4  nm)  .  .  .  ..........  5-17
 Figure 5-4.   Spectrum  of NH2  in  equilibrium with  100 mg/1
              of NH4  at  60UC.   (band  pass = 0.6  nm).  .	5-21
 Figure  5-5.   Calibration  curves  obtained  from the gaseous
              absorption method  	 5_22
 Figure  5-6.   Gas absorption spectrum over a retort wastewater	 5-29
 Figure 6-1.   Equilibrium for the reaction S0? + % 09 = SO-	6-7
                                            £      CO
 Figure 6-2.  Laboratory device for testing a flame as a
             sulfur converter.	 6-8
Figure 6-3.  Total sulfur system operated during the fall,
             1980 field test	6_14
Figure 6-4.  Total S  analyzer	 6-21
                                    X

-------
Figure 7-1.  Column and valve configuration used during the
             laboratory phase	  7=14

Figure 7-2.  I^S calibration curves obtained with the Dual
             Flame Photometric Detector as a function of
             peak area	  7-18

Figure 7-3.  HLS calibration curves obtained with the Dual
             Flame Photometric Detector as a function of peak
             height .	7-19

Figure 7-4.  H2S calibration curves obtained with the Single Flame
             Photometric Detector as a function of peak area	  7-21

Figure 7-5.  H£S calibration curves obtained with the Single Flame
             Photometric Detector as a function of peak height	7-22

Figure 7-6.  Quenching of the H£S Signal by co-eluting ethane for
             the single flame Photometric Detector operated in the
             normal mode	7-24

Figure 7-7.  Quenching of the HLS signal by co-eluting ethane for
             the Single Flame Pnotometric Detector operated in the
             reverse mode	7-25

Figure 7-8.  Quenching of the methyl mercaptan signal by co-eluting
             butane for the Single Flame Photometric Detector operated
             in the normal mode	7-27

Figure 7-9   Quenching of the methyl mercaptan signal by co-eluting
             butane for the Single Flame Photometric Detector operated
             in the reverse mode  .  .  .  .	7-28

Figure 7-10. Quenching of the H|S signal by co-eluting ethane for
             the Dual  Flame Photometric Detector.  	  7-30

Figure 7-11. Quenching of the methyl mercaptan signal by co-eluting
             butane for the Dual  Flame Photometric Detector  	  7-31

Figure 7-12. Retention times for the primary sulfur compounds with
             acetone-washed Porapak QS 	  	  7-37

Figure 7-13. Retention times for the secondary sulfur compounds
             with acetone-washed Porapak QS  .....	   7-33

Figure 7-14. Retention times for hydrocarbons with the acetone-
             washed Porapak QS :	7-39

Figure 7-15. Retention times for the primary sulfur compounds with 0V-
             210 on Porapak QS ......  	   7-40

Figure 7-16. Retention times for the secondary sulfur compounds
             with OV-210 on acetone-washed Porapak QS	7-42
                                   XI

-------
Figure 7-17. Retention times for hydrocarbons with OV-210
             on acetone-washed Porapak QS .......  	  7-43

Figure 7-18. Retention times for the primary sulfur compounds
             with Chromosil 310	7-45

Figure 7-19. Retention times for the secondary sulfur compounds
            __ with Chromosil 310	7-46

Figure 7-20. Retention times for hydrocarbons with Chromosil
             310.		7-47

Figure 7-21. Retention times for the primary sulfur compounds
             with Carbopack B HT 100	7-49

Figure 7-22. Retention times for the secondary sulfur compounds
             with Carbopack B HT 100.	7-50

Figure 7-23. Retention times for hydrocarbons with Carbopack
             B HT 100	  7-51

Figure 7-24. Chromatogram of retort gas sample: 6' x 1/8"
             Carbopack B HT 100 at 65 C isothermal	7-55

Figure 7-25. System for conditioning and supplying retort gas,
             standards, and support gases to various analyzers	7-50

Figure 7-26. Column and valve configuration for monitoring
             sulfur species in retort gases	  7-65

Figure 8-1.  Titration curve for a retort water sample.  	  8-4
                                  XII

-------
                                LIST OF TABLES

Number                                                                   Page

  2-1    Oxidation by H202 of Various S Species to S04= .	2-29
  3-1    Recovery of Sulfide at Various Concentrations
         and in Various Matrices	3-10
  3-2    Gran's Plot Outline	3-23
  4-1    Total  Solute by Freezing Point Depression	4-4
  5-1    Comparison of Ammoniacal  N Measurements
         Obtained by Independent Methods	5-26
  6-1    Conversion of Various S Compounds  to S02
         in Flame Converter	6-10
 6A-1    Production or Consumption of Gases During Combustion .  .  .  ,  .   6-25
  7-1    Relative Response of the FPD to Four Sulfur Gases
         with the Single-Flame FPD Operated in the Normal Mode	   7-34
  7-2    Integration and Valve Sequencing Programs for Figure 7-24.  .  .   7-56
  8-1    Recommended Procedures for the Analysis
         of Oil Shale Effluents .  .	   8-10
                                    XIII

-------
                                ACKNOWLEDGEMENT







     It is.  indeed  a  pleasure to acknowledge those who made this effort possi-



ble, most  notably the  U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency for  financial



support and the  project monitor,  Robert Thurnau,  for his  continued confidence.



The authors are  also indebted  to  the  Laramie Energy Technology  Center (Depart-



ment of Energy)  for  providing  opportunities and financial  support  for .applying



many of the methods  described  in this report under realistic field conditions



in support  of  the  test  of various pollution control  systems.  This involvement



has helped  provide direction to  the effort reported here  and has helped refine



and improve the  methods discussed, especially those dealing with the measure-



ment of sulfur species  and total  sulfur in retort gas.  Special thanks  at this



institution go to Richard  Poulson and  Dave Sheesley  for their advice and



encouragement.
                                      XIV

-------
                                   SECTION 1
                                 INTRODUCTION

     This report  is  written for chemists  and engineers  who  are  responsible for
developing pollution control technology for the oil shale and related synthetic
fuels industry.   It  describes  several  methods of  chemical  analysis  which  are
necessary  in  order  to  adequately  test  the  various  pollution  control
technologies which are presently being proposed  for the treatment of oil shale
retort  gases and  wastewaters.   When  possible,   it  includes step-by-step
protocols for  determining  important species, and  in  every  case,  it  provides
supporting evidence and discussion to allow the analyst to adjust the procedure
to the varied sample types which he may encounter.
     It  has  been recognized  for some  time  that  many  methods  of chemical
analysis  which  are  appropriate  for  relatively  simple  stack  gases  and
wastewaters  are  not  appropriate for retort gases and wastewaters (Fox et al. ,
1978; Felix  et al.,  1977;   Farrier et  al.,  1977;  Wildeman and  Meglen,  1979;
Wildeman, 1979;  Wallace,  1981).   This  situation arises largely because of the
large number of  interfering materials  found in many  retort samples  for which
the standard methods are not designed.   For this reason, the U.S.  Environmental
Protection Agency  initiated an  effort  to develop  improved methods of chemical
analysis  for oil shale  wastes.   This  effort  is  summarized  in this and a
previous report (Wallace, 1981).
     The objective of  the  work described in this report is to develop methods
of  analysis  which are  helpful  in selecting, monitoring  and optimizing the
various  pollution  control  systems  which may be applied  to oil shale  processes.
In the case  of wastewaters, present development plans call for "zero discharge"
of  any  contaminated  water.   The wastewater  engineer, therefore,  is  concerned
                                      1-1

-------
with  treating the wastewaters  for internal  re-use and requires analytical



methods  appropriate  for this  goal.   This  means that most  methods  must be



designed  for  the major and minor components  (e.g.  ammonia,  thiosulfate, etc.)



and not  necessarily  for the same species which are normally of interest to the



regulator who  is concerned with discharged waters.  Retort  gases, which are a



valuable  by-product  of the retorting process,  represent  a similar situation.



Such  gases  will  either be  burned for heat or otherwise consumed.   Once the gas



is burned,  the  resulting  flue  gas would be  similar to flue gases from any



number of other  utility and industrial sources and should not present special



problems to the  analyst.  However, many development plans call for treating the



gas for sulfur and possibly ammonia removal prior to combustion.  This requires



that  the  retort gas be  analyzed,  especially for the various  sulfur species



which may be  present.   The measurement of  sulfur species is thus one of the



procedures described in this report.



     These objectives imply that the analytical methods which are developed



meet  certain  criteria.  Methods  for  retort wastewaters must work well  with



waters which  are briney,  turbid,  colored and which contain high levels of



organic oils  and solutes.    Methods  for retort  gases  must tolerate complex



mixtures of hydrocarbons, inert gases, water vapor, and entrained material.  In



addition, the  methods  must  be  sufficiently  rugged to operate  in  a field



laboratory  where the  environmental   conditions  are 1 ess-than-ideal.   The



analyses described in  this report are therefore designed  to  be used  in a field



laboratory to provide  rapid feedback to the plant operator to optimize system



performance.  On the other hand,  methods  designed for  these  objectives are not



necessarily required to  be as sensitive  as  methods  designed  for  monitoring the



ambient environment or discharged streams.
                                      1-2

-------
     Most  methods discussed  in  this  report  have been  applied under field

conditions  to  a limited number of sample types with satisfactory results.  For

example, application of the methods  described  to  a series  of  retort wastewaters

herein  resulted in satisfactory ion balances.  At this  stage it  is prudent to

test these  methods with a wider  variety of waters and  gases,  an activity in

which  the  authors are  presently engaged.   The authors would also welcome

comments from  other analysts  regarding their experience  with the  methods

described in this report.   It is hoped that these methods will be applicable

not  only to oil  shale retort  process streams, but also  to  synfuel  wastes

generally.

     The recommended methods of analysis are summarized  in the  final chapter of

this report.  For  information-on additional methods, especially trace elements,

the  reader  is  referred to the first report prepared in  this  project (Wallace,

1981).

REFERENCES

Farrier, D.S.,   R.E.  Poulson, Q.D.  Skinner,  and J.C. Adams.   1977.   Acqui-
     sition, Processing,  and Storage  for Environmental Research of  Aqueous
     Effluents Derived from in Situ Oil Shale  Processing.  Proc.  Second Pacific
     Chemical Engineering Conference.   Denver, CO.'

Felix,  U.D., D.S.  Farrier,  and R.E. Poulson.   1977.   High Performance Liquid
     Chromatographic Characterization of Oil Shale Retort Waters.   Proc. Second
     Pacific Engineering Conference.  Denver,  CO.

Fox, J.P.,  D.S.  Farrier,  and R.E. Poulson.  1978.   Chemical  Characterization
     and Analytical  Considerations   for an  in  Situ Oil  Shale Process  Water.
     LETC/RI-78/7.

Wallace, J.R.  1981.   The Analysis of Oil Shale Wastes:  A Review.  EPA-600/S7-
     81-084.  pb. 81-190.522..

Wildeman, T.R.   March  1979.   Sampling  and  Handling  Of Oil Shale Solids  And
     Liquids.  Oil Shale Symposium:   Sampling, Analysis, and Quality Assurance.
     Denver Research Institute.   Denver, CO.

Wildeman, T.R.,  and  R.R.  Meglen.   1978.  Analysis of  Oil  Shale Materials for
     Element Balance Studies.   In Analytical  Chemistry of  Liquid  Fuel  Sources.
     P.C. Uden,  and  S. Siggia,  eds.  Adv.  in  Chem.   Series  170.  Washing-
     ton D.C.
                                      1-3

-------
                                   SECTION 2



            MINOR ANIONS IN RETORT WASTEWATER BY ION CHROMATOGRAPHY








     Previous investigators have  shown that, in addition  to  HC03~ and C03=,



several important minor  anions also  occur in retort wastewaters.   For example,



Haas (1980)  reported  sulfide  in the  range of 500-1,000 mg/1  as  the major anion



after HC03~ and CQ3= in condensate from the TOSCO II process.  He also reported



total organic acids  at levels of approximately  4,000 mg/1.   On  the other hand,



Fox et al.  (1978) reported an absence of sulfide but the presence of the more



oxidized sulfur species  S203=, S04=, and SCN~  in  a retort wastewater from  an



in-situ process.  Fox's  results for  S03= were  uncertain,  ranging from <20  to



925 mg/1,  due to  the  lack of  adequate analytical  techniques, while a single,



unconfirmed  determination  of  S406=  gave  a  level  of 280 mg/1.   On  the other



hand, Stuber et al.  (1978) reported  S406= to be absent from  most  retort  waters



(e.g.,  <5 mg/1).   They also reported the major S species to be S203=, S04=,  and



SCN~.



     Previous work  also has  suggested the  absence of several  species.   For



example, none  of  the  investigators  cited  in the previous  paragraph have



detected CN~,  N02~,  N03~,  or P043~  in  retort  wastewaters,  species whose



presence might be  suspected in the condensate from a combustion source.  It  has



also been proposed that even if CN~ were initially present, it would be removed



rapidly by  reaction with  S203=  to form  SCN~ + S032~  (Luthy et al., 1977).



While Fox reported  significant levels of Cl~, most other investigators report



Cl~ only at  trace levels;  it is thus likely that the Cl~ in Fox's samples was



due to  the  intrusion  of ground water which  was known  to have  occurred  with



these  samples.  In  the authors' experience,  largely with  retort wastewaters



from the 150-ton retort at the DOE facility in Laramie, the prevalent inorganic
                                      2-1

-------
minor anions  are  S203-,  S04-, and SCN .   S03-  is occasionally observed, for
example after waters have been exposed to H2S and air.
     While the  above-referenced  studies  indicate several minor  species  which
occur in  retort water,  they also indicate a degree  of variability among  waters
from different sources.   These investigators, as well as others (Wallace, 1981)
also emphasized that  many of the analytical  techniques  were not adequate to
determine  the  desired  species  unambiguously and quantitatively.  This  is
important  because  measurement of several  of the species discussed above  is
important  to  the  design  and operation of  pollution control  systems.   In
addition,  if  unknown  to  the analyst, their  presence  can interfere with  other
chemical analyses.  Their measurement is  also important for quality  control,
since anion/cation  balances  cannot be completed  until  their concentrations are
known.
     The objective  of the work described herein  was  thus  to develop  reliable
methods of chemical analysis for the anions in retort wastewaters.  The methods
were to be primarily  for the purpose  of  evaluating  and  controlling the
operation  of  various  pollution  control  systems under field conditions, and as
such were  to  be field-worthy and easily  performed  by a technician.  Results
were to be available  rapidly in  order to  aid in  adjusting  the operation  of the
pollution control  equipment.  Another requirement was that the analyses require
a minimal  amount  of equipment and space,  so  that all necessary supplies and
equipment  could be easily  transported  to  a  field site in  a van or  small
trailer.
     The  efficacy  of both  standard  and  less routine  methods for analyzing
retort wastewaters  has  been reviewed by Wallace  (1981),  to  which the  reader  is
referred for more detailed information.   Suffice it to say that many methods  of
analysis clearly needed  to be improved or replaced.  Others were not suitable
                                      2-2

-------
for field use, requiring too much equipment or too much operator time.  In many



cases, methods were  simply not investigated or validated for retort waters in



terms of possible interferences, accuracy, or precision.



     Because of  the  necessity of determining several  of  the minor species in



retort water, and because of the inadequacies of the available methods, efforts



were  made  to develop  additional  techniques  for  retort   water.   Ion



chromatography (Small et al. ;  1975)  was  selected as  a likely technique because



of  its  ability  to determine  several  species simultaneously:  it  is  clearly



preferable  to  field one  instrument  rather  than  ten, and more  feasible  to



develop one  method  rather  than several.   In  this regard,  ion chromatography is



easily  performed in  field  laboratories,  since  the  instrument is  easily



transported and minimal  supporting apparatus is required.



     The  application of  ion  chromatography to  complex  samples  has  been



described  by several authors.   For example,  Courtney (1976)  applied ion



chromatography to the measurement of inorganic anions  and  cations in various



biological  fluids.   Hansen et al. (1979) reported the development of better



eluents for  the  determination of As043~ and  S03= in leachates  from flue  dust



samples.   They  also  found that  S03=  was difficult  to  determine by ion



chromatography  because   it  readily  oxidized  during  the chromatographic



separation.   Holcombe  et  al.  (1979)  applied ion  chromatography  to  the



measurement of S03=, S04=, and S203= in solutions from flue gas desulfurization



units.  Two  separate runs  were required, the  first  with  a weaker eluent for



S03=  and  S04=,  and  the  second with a stronger eluent for S203=.  McFadden and



Garland (1979),  in  attempting to develop an  ion  chromatographic method for oil



shale wastewaters,  succeeded in separating the  early  eluters F~,  Cl~, N02~,



P043~,  S03=,  and S04= on a  single column;  the later eluters, I", S203=, and



SCN~  were  separated  on  a different  column.   Trujillo et  al. (1981) measured
                                      2-3

-------
S203= in  leachate  from spent oil  shale with an ion chromatograph equipped with
a shortened  column;  however, all  earlier peaks (F~ to S04=)  eluted as a single
peak.  For a more  detailed  review of the application of ion chrom'atography to
oil   shale and  other  environmental samples, the  reader  is  referred to Wallace
(1981),  Mulik (1979), or Sawicki (1978).
     In spite  of these promising reports,  early experience in  the  author's
laboratory indicated that further work remained before ion chromatography could
be applied routinely  to the analysis of  oil  shale wastewaters.   Although the
early eluters—F~, Cl~, N02~,  P043~,  S03~,  and S04=—could indeed be separated
when injected as a  pure standard, in  real  retort wastewaters  the F~ and Cl~
peaks were often obscured  by additional unknown species.  The quantitation of
F~ and  Cl~  was further complicated  by the co-elution of  the  water  dip and
carbonate dip  (Small  et  a!.,   1975).   More  importantly,  after the  first
injection of real  retort  waters,  subsequent  analyses were  essentially
impossible because of  a drifting baseline, presumably due to  the elution of
highly retained  retort water  components.   Another problem  with the direct
application   of  ion chromatography to  retort  wastewaters was the  tailing of
SCN~, which  significantly  decreased  its detection limit  and  increased analysis
time.
     The effort described  in this report was thus directed towards developing
and  improving ion  chromatography  for the routine  and repetitive analysis of
retort wastewaters for non-carbonate anions.
     Several  different  eluents and  eluent additives  were evaluated  for  the
purpose of  improving the  SCN~ peak.   Solvent  programming and non-standard
column configurations were  also evaluated in  an effort  to  elute S203= and SCN~
in  reasonable  time  while   still  separating  the  early eluting  compounds.
                                      2-4

-------
Throughout  this  effort retort  waters  were run frequently  in  order to gain



experience with realistic samples.



     In order  to  evaluate various eluents and eluent strengths as efficiently



as possible, it is helpful to use the expression (Breyer and Reiman, 1961)





(1)                 ta = t - tv = KAs/a



     where t    = adjusted retention time
            u


           t    = absolute retention time
            r


           t    = time for one void volume to elute



           A    = eluent concentration



           s, a = valence of sample and eluent, respectively



           K    = constant for any given resin and eluent





This expression allows  retention data to be plotted  in  a concise manner and



permits the  estimate  of retention times for a  variety of conditions  based  on



relatively few measurements.   The application  of this approach is illustrated



in the discussion section of this report.



     The following  material  describes  the  development  of four separate  ion



chromatographic assays  for  retort  water.   The  first,  termed  the  "majors



protocol",  measures  the major non-carbonate species  normally  encountered in



retort wastewater—S04=, S203=, and SCN~—as well  as N03~.  The second measures



the early eluters  but misses S203= and SCN~.   The third protocol  detects SCN~



and S203= but  misses  the early eluters.  The  final protocol measures  total S



after digestion with H202.



EXPERIMENTAL



     All analyses  were performed  in  a Dionex  (Sunnyvale,  CA)  Model  10 ion



chromatograph equipped with  an electrical  conductivity detector.  At  the  start



of  this investigation  the  standard column  sequence  of  injection  valve -
                                      2-5

-------
precolumn - analytical column - suppressor column - detector was employed.  The
columns,  also  supplied by  Dionex,  were as follows:   (1)  precolumns,  6 mm x
50 mm, #  30986,  fast  run  type; (2) analytical column, 6 mm x 250 mm, # 30985,
fast  run  type;  (3)  suppression columns, normal type,  12 mm x  100  mm,  #30828.
All  sample  injections were  made  with a 100 pi sample  loop.   Peak area and
height  measurements  were  accomplished  on a  Hewlett  Packard  (Avondale)
Model 3390 integrator.
     Eluents and  standard  solutions were made from reagent grade chemicals-and
deionized,  distilled  water unless  otherwise  indicated.   Stock  standard
solutions, from which the  working standards were prepared, were prepared at a
concentration of  10,000 mg/1,  from  their Na or K  salts.  Thiosulfate solutions
decomposed in a  matter of  hours unless prepared in freshly boiled, distilled,
deionized water,  in which  case they were stable for several months.  Standards
for  S03=  were prepared  from  the  formaldehyde-bisulfite  addition  compound
CH20:NaHS03 (Aldrich  Chemicals).  Stock standard  solutions prepared from this
addition  compound were stable  for  approximately  2 months although working
standards in the range 1-100 mg/1  had to be prepared fresh daily.
     Samples of retort wastewater and steam-stripped retort wastewaters  were
filtered  after collection  and  stored at 5°C.   Before injection  into the sample
loop, the sample was  diluted  with  d.i.,  distilled water if necessary  and
injected through a 0.45 urn  pore size membrane filter (Gelman  Acrodisc #4184).
     The  conductivity detector was  calibrated periodically  with  KC1  and
standards were  run before  and after each  series of analyses and  whenever
conditions were changed.
     During the  early stages  of  this investigation, a rudimentary form of
solvent programming was attempted  in order to  achieve an adequate  separation of
the early eluters while still eluting S203= and SCN~ in reasonable  time.  Since
                                      2-6

-------
the  Diortex  system is  not equipped with  solvent programming  capabilities,
exponential solvent  programming  was  achieved by feeding the high pressure pump
from a stirred beaker which in turn was fed from two reservoirs—one containing
a  strong  eluent and the  other,  the weak eluent.  An  exponential  change in
solvent composition was achieved by switching from one reservoir to the other.
     Various eluents,  including  a range of NaHC03 and  Na2C03  concentrations,
were tested in  order to  find  one capable  of separating the early eluters while
still eluting SCN~  in  a  reasonable time.   Eluent additives were  also  evaluated
for their ability  to improve  the  SCN~  peak,  which  tended to tail badly with
most eluents.    Eluents and additives included NaHC03 + Na2C03 over a range of
concentrations;  5 mM Na2C03/0.75 mM p-cyanophenol; 20 mM boric acid adjusted to
pH 11 with NaOH;  10  mM 4-amino-benzoic acid adjusted to pH 11 with NaOH; 7 mM
Na2C03  in  10%  acetonitrile;  7 mM  Na2C03/0.75 mM  p-cyanophenol;  7 mM
Na2C03/0.5 mg/1  SCN~,  added as  NaSCN;  10  mM phthalamide adjusted to pH  11 with
NaOH; 10  mM  n-butylboron  adjusted to  pH 11  with NaOH;  10 mM succinimide
adjusted  to pH  11 with NaOH.   Methylene-bis-thiocyanate and 2-thiohydantoin
were also evaluated as additives to NaC03.
     Because of the long  retention  times  and  tailing of  thiosulfate  and
thiocyanate the valve  arrangement in the  Dionex Model  10 ion chromatograph was
modified  to that shown  in Figure 2-1.   Addition of an  8 port slider valve
between the load/inject  valve and the  separator valve  enables the sample to
progress through both pre-columns and main separator column or only through the
pre-columns.   The air-driven  slider  valves are operated under program control
of the Hewlett  Packard Model  3390 integrator, which  operates through  a  Hewlett
Packard Model  19400A Event Control Module and home-made electronic/pneumatic
                                      2-7

-------
                Ul
                                                           «=r.
                                                           ce
                                                          o
                                                          o
                                                           o
                                                           CJ
                                                           
                                                           Q.
                                                           ft
                                                           cc





                                                           1
                                                           o
                                                           or
                                                           i

                                                          CO
                                                          ce
CVJ
>








/\



00

*M
•5»


. «K
z o
UJ >
~~t llJ
w ul
cc








. a
3 0
UJ >
\ UJ
Ul *"
a:
1
/'-\
\
\
s












ro
^^

/\





ac
O
0 >
CM o:
X Ul
en
Ul
cc






II










cc
. 0
Ul CC
O UJ
UJ CO
CC Ul

2-5

-------
interface.   With  this  design modification  several  different protocols were
designed and tested, as described below:
     1.    Major anions.  This protocol allows  the determination of the major
          non-carbonate inorganic  anions  in retort wastewaters—S04=, S203=,
          and SCN~—during a single run.   N03~ is also determined.
               For this protocol the  sample is injected with both pre-columns
          and separator columns  in  line.   After four minutes the precolumn is
          switched out of  line  (valve V6) leaving S203=  and SON"  on  the pre-
          column while the  analysis of the earlier species  continues on  the
          main analytical  column.  After the earlier peaks have eluted from the
          main analytical  column (approximately  15  minutes  into the run),  the
          main analytical  column is switched out of  line and the  pre-columns
          are switched in  line.  S203= and  SCN~  then  elute  from  the pre-column
          and proceed  directly  to  the suppressor column.   The entire analysis*
          is complete  in  approximately 35 minutes.  The eluent for this proce-
          dure is 7.0 mM C03= at a flow rate of 2.3 ml/min.
     2.    Late eluters.  S203=  and  SCN"  are separated and  analyzed  with  the
          pre-columns  switched  in-line and  the main analytical column switched
          out of  line  using an  eluent of 7 mM Na2C03/0.5 mg/1 NaSCN at a  flow
          rate of 2.3  ml/min.   SzOs^  and SCN~ are well separated  while early
          components elute  as a group.  The analysis is  complete  in  approxi-
          mately 15 minutes.
     3.    Early eluters.   The earlier  eluting  compounds  (Cl~ through SOD  are
          separated  using  3 mM  Na2C03 at a flow rate of 2.3 ml/min.  This
          protocol begins with  all  columns  in line.  After  the  early eluters
          have passed  the  pre-columns  (Ca.  7 minutes), valve V6  is switched to
          isolate the  late  eluters, S203= and SCN",  on the column while  the
                                      2-9

-------
          analysis of  the  early eluters  proceeds.   Immediately before the next



          sample injection, the pre-columns are switched back in line to retain



          S203= and SCN~ in the next sample.



               If the  pre-columns  were never cleaned, the later eluters would



          start to bleed  onto  the main analytical column.  This is avoided by



          rinsing the  pre-column  with  7  mM Na2C03 every  third analysis.   For



          this purpose valves V7 and V8 are switched (Figure 2-1), thereby per-



          mitting the late eluters to be rinsed to waste,  a procedure requiring



          approximately 10 minutes.



     4.    Total S.   This  procedure converts the  various  forms-of S  to  S04=



          which is then determined.   For this purpose 30%  H202  is added to a



          25 ml aliquot of  sample in an open, stirred, beaker while measuring



          the Eh with a Pt electrode.  H202 is added until the Eh stabilizes at



          approximately +0.4V vs.  an Ag/AgCl  electrode.   (In  practice,  5 ml of



          H202 is normally  more than sufficient.)  After  allowing the solution



          to mix for  several  minutes,  it  is  transferred  to a hot plate  and



          boiled for 5 minutes to remove or decompose the H202.  After cooling,



          the solution is  transferred  to a 100 ml  volumetric  flask and brought



          to volume.    The  resulting  solution is  analyzed for S04 using proce-



          dure 1 above.



RESULTS AND DISCUSSION



     In  the Dionex  system background conductivity  due  to  the eluent  is



minimized  by passage  through  the suppressor column, which  contains  a



hydrogen-form cation  exchange  resin.  Nevertheless,  a residual  conductivity



remains due  to  the  partial  dissociation of the weakly acidic eluents.  In the



case of  carbonate  eluents,  the background  conductivity is  typically 10-20 (j



Siemens while peak heights are typically 10-100 u Siemens.
                                     2-10

-------
     Original  attempts  to  employ exponential  solvent  programming with



NaHC03/Na2C03  mixtures  resulted  in  baseline  shifts  in the  electrical



conductivity detector which were too large to permit quantitative measurements.



Attempts were made to minimize this problem by matching the conductivity of the



original and  final  eluents.   In the case  of  a gradient from NaHC03 to Na2C03



such  a matching  can in  theory be achieved  simply by  using equal-molar



concentrations of each,  since the background conductivity  is  due only to  the



amount of dissolved C02 eluting from the suppressor column.   When this approach



was  tried,  the initial  and  final  background conductivities were  indeed the



same; however, an unacceptably large background peak occurred shortly after the



Na2C03 flow was  started,  obscuring many of the  peaks  of interest.   This peak



can be explained  by considering the action of C03= as it encounters the anion



exchange resin in the  analytical  column which has  equilibrated with a dilute



HC03~ eluent.  Since C03= is a stronger eluent  than  HC03~, it will displace



HC03~ from the resin according to the reaction





(2)                 2(R-HC03-) + C03= -»• R2C03= + 2HC03~





As can be  seen,  this reaction causes a  temporary  increase  in  total  carbonate



level and  hence  an  increase  in  background  conductivity in the  detector.  Under



the  conditions  tested,  an exponential  NaHC03/Na2C03  solvent gradient was



therefore unsatisfactory and was discontinued.



     In order  to minimize background  shifts  during gradient programming, a



search was made  for other possible eluents.  Ideally,  such  an eluent should



have a  high  pK   in comparison to  H2C03  (pK  = 6.4)  in  order  to minimize
               3                             cl


dissociation after  the  suppressor  column.   Also,   it  must  be  sufficiently



soluble in both  the acid and ionized form, and  be stable in the presence  of
                                     2-12

-------
air.  Of  course,  a satisfactory eluent must also have a strong enough affinity



to the resin to elute the analytes rapidly enough.



     Eluents tested  for  this purpose included hydroquinone (pK = 10.35),  boric
                                                               a.


acid (pK =  9.1),  4-aminobenzoic acid, phthalimide, n-butylboron, succinimide,
        a


and saccharin  (2-sulfobenzoic acid imide).   (Acids were converted to the  basic



form  by  addition  of NaOH.)  Each  of these  proved to be  unsatisfactory.



Hydroquinone promptly ruined the columns, presumably due  to  th'e irreversible



attachment  of  macromolecules which formed due to the  exposure of the eluent to



air during  the preparation  process.   The background conductivity of saccharin



was too high, most likely due to the presence of the sulfonic acid arising from



the decomposition  of saccharin  in basic  solution.  The other eluents either



were too  weak or  resulted  in excessive background conductivity.  While  the



excessive conductivities may have been due to impurities, time did not permit a



more exhaustive study of alternate eluents.



     Because of the  apparent difficulty of finding an  eluent system suitable



for  solvent programming,  efforts were  directed  tdWards  optimizing  the



NaHC03/Na2C03  eluent  for  retort waters.   The first problem was the tailing of



the SCN~  peak with  the  standard  eluent  (2.4 mM NaHC03/3 mM  Na2C03).   To



minimize tailing two approaches were tried:  (1) the use of stronger eluents,



and (2) the addition of trace  species  which  resemble the SCN~.  The  latter



approach is based on the  supposition that the  SCN~  tailing is due to the



presence of a  minority  of sites which bind SCN~ more tightly and which may be



blocked through the  action  of similar species.  Additives  to Na2C03 included



p-cyanophenol,  2-thiohydantoin,  acetonitrile, methylene-bis-thiocyanate,   and



NaSCN.   Of  these,  the  first three additives showed  no  effect.   The fourth



additive caused a  slight  improvement,  but the most significant improvement was



for 0.5 mg/1 SCN~ in 7 mM Na2C03.  Figure 2-2 compares the elution of SCN~
                                     2-12

-------
   START-}
A
    TIME
   START -
    TIME
                              _ C2H302,C.f
                            SO=41N03
                                 FIGURE 2-2
           Ion chromatograph of S203= and SCN~ in retort  waters
           A.  Eluent =  7mM Na2C03
           B.  Eluent =  7mM NaoCO, +0.5 mg/1 Na SCN
                                    2-13

-------
using this  eluent with two pre-columns.  As can be seen, NaSCN both increases



the  eluent  strength and  improves  the SCN~ peak.  For  this  reason the 7 mM



NaC03/0.5 mg/1 NaSCN eluent was chosen as optimum for SCN~.



     In  order  to  more   systematically  develop  a separation  with  the



NaHC03/Na2C03 eluent system,  the retention times for  the ions of interest were



measured and  plotted against eluent concentration, as shown  in  Figure  2-3.   As



is illustrated  for  the case of Cl~, N02~, N03~, and S04=, the retention times



vary with eluent  strength as predicted by equation 1.  Thus, if the retention



times for the ions  of  interest are. known  at  one eluent strength  and  column



length,  retention times  can be predicted  over a range of concentration  and



column lengths.   Next,  this relationship was used to most efficiently select an



eluent to separate the  desired species.



     The utility  of equation 1  is  further illustrated by Figure  2-4,  which



includes retention  data  for three different eluents:   NaHC03,  equimolar



NaHC03/Na2C03, and Na2C03.  In this figure the abscissa for each of the eluents



is shifted  in order to make the retention  times overlap.   One of the  first



observations  in Figure 2-4  is that  the  strength  of the  equimolar  NaHC03/Na2C03



eluent is almost exactly one-half that of the  Na2C03  eluent.   This implies that



the NaHC03  component in  the former solution is  not active in displacing  the



analyte  ions  from the resin.   However, the  NaHC03  component  nevertheless



contributes  to background conductivity  and shortens  the suppressor  lifetime.



For these reasons  NaHC03  was dropped from future eluents for  most samples.



     Figure  2-4 also suggests that much  of the strength of the NaHC03 eluent is



due to the  presence of carbonates.   Were HCOg the only eluent  ion binding to



the  resin,  the  slopes  for the monovalent  ions would  be -1.   Instead,  their



measured slopes  are approximately -0.7,  suggesting a mixed eluent system.
                                     2-14

-------
    10
Ul
•as.
LU
CK
O
t/5
O
            A  CHLORIDE
            a  NITRITE
            •  NITRATE
            +  SULFATE
                                 I I
                                              I	I
                                                          I  I  I I
                                                                                  I    I   i
                                    1.0
                              ELUENT (No2C03) CONCENTRATION (mM)
10
                                        FIGURE  2-3

                Variation of adjusted retention  time with eluent strength
                                         2-15

-------
   100
    10
LU
2
ce

o

   Q.
                                                         Na2C03


                                                         50^50 NagC03/NaHC03

                                                         NaHC0
                                       ELUENT STRENGTH (mM//)
                                                                  . . I
                                     1.0
                                               No2C03

                                              	I
                             5.0
                                       10
                              50
 1-0 50:50 Na2C03/NoHC03 5-(
J	I	
                                                             10
                                                      50
        1.0
5.0
         10.0
                                           NoHCO.
50.0
       FIGURE 2-4.  ADJUSTED RETENTION TIMES FOR THREE ELUENTS
                                           2-16

-------
       A  more thorough examination  of  the  derivation of equation   1  (Reiman,


  1961) would  indicate that the constant K can be factored  into two parts, K  and
                                                                           3

  K  ,  where  K  depends only on the  sample  ion and K  , only on the eluent ion.
                                                    a.

  Equation 1 can then be written as
 (3)
log t  = log K  + log K  - (f) log A
 While the absolute  values  of Kg and Kg cannot be known, relative values of K
                                                                              5

 for a given column material can be assigned by injecting a series of ions while


 keeping the eluent  constant.   Once relative values of K  are assigned for one


 eluent,  other eluents can  be evaluated,  at least  in  theory, by measuring the


 retention time of a  single sample ion,  at which point the retention times can


 be calculated  for the other ions.


      In  practice  the approach  described  mathematically in  the previous


 paragraph  can  be most readily  implemented graphically,  as is illustrated  in


 Figure 2-4.  Once retention times  are measured  at a few points,  they  can be


 plotted  linearly on  log-log  graph paper in order  to  establish  the expected


 retention  times  over  a  range of  conditions.   A new  eluent  can  readily be


 evaluated  by  injecting a few ions, at which point  the corresponding retention


 times  for other  ions can be  graphically  calculated by plotting the  data as


 shown  in  the  figure.  Retention times for other column  lengths can  also be


 estimated since tr is proportional to column length, all else being equal.


     While  equation 3 and  the  associated graphical  approach provide a


 systematic basis  for optimizing a separation, the practitioner must be aware of


 additional factors.   First,  besides the eluent strength, other variables may be


manipulated in  order  to achieve  the desired  separation, including  pH,


temperature,  the  presence of chelating agents,  and column materials.   Second,
                                     2-17

-------
in the  authors'  experience,  equation 3 is not necessarily obeyed exactly, and



therefore the chromatographic conditions must be tested close to the conditions



finally selected.  Third, the previous paragraphs take no account of peak shape



or tailing, which must often be considered on an individual basis.



     Using  the  approach  described in the previous  paragraph,  four protocols



were developed  for  the ions  encountered in retort wastewater.   Since the late



eluters S203= and  SCN~ could not be  separated  in  a reasonable  time under the



same conditions  as  the early eluters, the column switching procedure described



in the experimental section of this report was developed for the major species.



     Figure 2-5  shows  a  chromatogram of a typical  retort water  sample analyzed



with the majors  protocol.  Although  a peak  is often observed near 4.9 minutes,



Cl~ and acetate  are not  adequately resolved in  this region of the chromatogram



so that definitive assignment is not possible.   (Occasionally retort waters are



encountered which  give a  much  broader peak at  4/9 minutes, suggesting the



presence of mixed  organic  acids.)  With the retort waters encountered in the



authors' laboratory, the region  between the Cl~/Ac~ peak and the S04= peak is



normally empty,  indicating the absence of S03~,  N02~, and P043~.  However, when



a peak  occasionally  does  occur  in this region,  definitive  assignment requires



the use of a weaker eluent.  If enough information  is known about the sample to



exclude two of  the  possible  three ions in this  region, analysis could proceed



for peaks occurring  between  Cl"/acetate peak and the S04=  peak.  As indicated



in the  figure,  S04=, S203=,  and  SCN~  are clearly resolved  during  a  time period



of approximately 30 minutes.  N03~,  although normally not observed  in retort



wastewaters  in  significant  amounts,  occurs immediately after  S04=.   The



separation of N03~  from  S04~ is adequate  for quantitation  when  NOg is present



in significant amounts.
                                     2-18

-------
                           FIGURE 2-5.
Ion chromatogram of a retort wastewater using the majors protocol
                            2-19

-------
     Figure 2-6 shows calibration  curves  for Cl  ,  N03 ,  S04-,  S203-,  and SCN
obtained with the majors  protocol.   For these species the calibration curves
are linear over the  range 3-100 mg/1.   At higher concentrations the retention
times  tend to  decrease,  especially  for  the  late  eluters,  making  peak
identification  less   certain.   At  lower  levels  baseline  drift  limits
detectability.  Either peak  height or  peak area can be used for quantisation,
although peak height  is  normally less  subject to  interference  due to nearby
peaks.
     When  S203= and  SCN~ are  the  only species of  interest, the  most rapid
method is  to  use  7 mM NaC03 with  0.5 mM  NaSCN as  the eluent, which minimizes
tailing of the  SCN~  peak, with only the two pre-columns  in  line.   Under these
conditions acetate through  nitrate elute unresolved in about 4 minutes,  while
S203=  and SCN"  elute  in  approximately 8  and  15 minutes  respectively
(Figure 2-2b).  Figure 2-7  shows calibration  curves  over the  concentration
range 1-300 mg/1.   While  linear over most of  the  range,  slight curvature is
apparent between 100  and  300 mg/1. This curvature is most likely explained by
initial column  saturation effects,  especially since elution times start  to
decrease at 300 mg/1.
     The  third  protocol  is  for the  early  eluters,  acetate  -  S04=, including
N03~, which  elutes before S04= with the  eluent  used for this  protocol.   As
described in the Experimental section of this report, and as normally practiced
in the authors' laboratory,  this procedure employs 3 mM  Na2C03.   However,  as
will be  seen in the  following discussion,  this  eluent concentration is  not
appropriate  in  every situation  and  must be adapted  to sample  requirements,
although  the  valving sequence can  remain basically unchanged.   It is  therefore
proposed  that the analyst use  this  basic procedure for measuring the early
eluters in retort water, but that he be prepared to alter the eluent to meet
                                     2-20

-------
C/3
OS
as
o
Ul
UJ
Q.
   IxlO
              —A— CHLORIDE
              —•— SULFATE
              —o— NITRATE
              —o~ THIOSULFATE
              —*— THIOSYNATE

                         j—i—i
                                                       j	i  i  i  i
                                     10
30
100
                                      CONCENTRATION (mg/e)
                                  FIGURE 2-6
              Calibration  curves  obtained with the majors protocol for
                            Cl,  NOg, SO^, SgOg, and SCN"
300
                                      2-21

-------
1x10 V
1x10'
                   THIOSULFATE
                   THIOCYNATE
                                   10             30              100
                                   CONCENTRAflON (mq/1]

                                     FIGURE 2-7
            Calibration curves obtained with the  protocol  for late eluting
                                      compounds
300
                                       2-22

-------
sample requirements.  The  following discussion  summarizes  information of which



the analyst should be aware to obtain  acceptable results.



     Figure 2-8 contains chromatograms  obtained with this protocol using two



different eluents.   The first  chromatogram  shows  an adequate separation of



acetate,  Cl~, N02-,  S03=,  and S04= using  3 mM Na2C03.  Comparison  of the first



and second chromatograms illustrates  one  of the first problems with the early



eluters:   the  position  of the  acetate  peak depends not only  on the  eluent



strength, but  also  on the  condition of the  suppressor column, moving to an



earlier position as the suppressor column  is exhausted.  This phenomenon is  due



to the retention  of acetate  by the hydrogen-form  but  not the sodium-form of



resin in the suppressor column by ion  exclusion  effects.   The analyst hoping to



determine both  acetate  and Cl~ clearly must consider  this possible interfer-



ence.   Another potential difficulty with Cl" and acetate is that their position



is near  the  water and carbonate dips, which appear as negative peaks near the



start of the chromatogram.   Depending  on the concentration range of acetate  and



Cl~,  these  peaks must  be  separated  through proper  selection  of eluent and



column in  order  to  obtain quantitative results (Stevens  et al.,  1981).  In



practice, interferences  due   to  carbonate and  acetate  can be minimized by



minimizing ion  exclusion effects in  the  suppressor  columns,  for example,  by



using  a  sufficiently short suppressor  column.   (Unfortunately,  shorter sup-



pressor  columns require more frequent  regeneration.)  Another  approach  to



eliminating  the migration  of  the carbonate and  acetate  peaks  is the use of a



fiber  suppressor  column, for  which retention by ion exclusion does  not occur



(Stevens et al.,  1981).   Thus, while the analysis for Cl" and acetate should be



approached with caution, careful column selection  should make  these  determina-



tions  feasible.
                                     2-23

-------
                       FIGURE 2-8
                  (Cont'd on next page)
Ion chromatograms of standards obtained using the early
                     eluter protocol
A.  eluent = 3 mM Na2C039 suppressor column almost spent
B.  same conditions as A, regenerated suppressed column
.C.  standard eluent (2.4 mM Na2C03/3.0 mM NaHC03)
D.  same as C, but sample also contains SO"
                         2-24

-------
Cl
              S04=
                 STOP
                    — TIME
                          TIME
                      25.0 min.
 .CJL~
                     -—TIME
                  22.0min.
                        TIME
                   22.0min.
           2-25

-------
     Figure 2-8d illustrates another potential interference.  With a 3 mM Na2C03
eluent, S03= co-elutes  with N03~ and P043~.  However,  for  the retort waters
encountered  in  the  authors' laboratory, this potential  interference has not
posed a problem since the retort wastewaters encountered have contained neither
P043~ nor N03~  in significant  amounts.   Furthermore,  this protocol  is  normally
carried out  only after  the "majors analysis" has  been  completed,  so that  the
absence of  N03~ has  already  been established.   However,  should  P043~  be
present, perhaps as an  additive to a  biological  reactor,  its peak can be
displaced by adjusting  the pH,  as is illustrated in Figure  2-8c.   In this
figure acetate, Cl~,  N02~,  P043~,  S03=,  and S04=  are  separated using an  eluent
of 2.4 mM Na2C03/3.0-mM  NaHC03,  although N03~ would  still not be  adequately
separated from S03=.
     Figure 2-9 illustrates the  adjusted  retention  times  for seven  early
eluters obtained with eluents of various strengths containing Na2C03 and NaHC03
in a ratio of 2.4/3.0 on a fast run column.   In using this diagram it should be
kept in mind that the position of the P043~ peak  can  also be  adjusted  relative
to the other peaks  by varying the pH of the eluent.  This diagram suggests  that
the best separation  of the seven early eluters could be  obtained with an eluent
of 1.4 mM Na2C03/1.8 mM NaHC03.  (Such a separation is shown in Figure 2-8d and
indicates that the  separation of NOi and Sol is not yet  complete.)   Figure  2-10
demonstrates calibration curves  for  the early eluters  (with  the exception of
N03~) obtained with  this protocol.
     The measurement  of  total  sulfur, the  fourth  procedure reported, serves  as
a check on  the  completeness of the analyses of the individual  S species.   This
procedure, as described in the Experimental section of this  report, involves no
new chromatographic  procedure,  but only an oxidation with H202.
                                     2-26

-------
   100.0
   10.0
e
"I
CO
UJ
as
O
LU
Ul
IK
tn
=3
"3
                              o—
                              o —
                              o—
                              'o—
                              o—
                              o—
                              o
  •o •
  -o-
  • o-
  • o-
-D	o ACETATE
- +	o CHLORIDE
	o NITRITE
	o PHOSPHATE
	o SULFITE
.__.o	o NITRATE
  -o	—o SULFATE
    1.0
    o.r
                      j_
                     I/3X            IX             3X
                        ( X TIMES ELUENT STRENGTH STD. ELUENT

                                  FIGURE 2-9

                Adjusted retention times for  seven ions with
                standard eluent (2.4 mM COg + 3.0 mM HCOj)
                                   2-27

-------
     The effect of  this  oxidation is shown in Table 2-1 for four retort water
samples.  The original concentrations  of S203=,  S04=, and  S03=  were measured
using the "majors protocol";  S= and S03=, which were  absent in the original
samples, were added  using  standard solutions. Closure is within experimental
error, which supports  the  validity of the individual  determinations obtained
with the "majors protocol", as well as the oxidation procedure.   Because of the
possibility of occurrence of other, unexpected S species in retort wastewaters,
it is recommended that the total S measurement be run periodically.
     In the authors'  laboratory,  retort waters are analyzed  routinely  by  ion
chromatography for  S04=, N03~,  $203=,  and SOT and  occasionally  for Cl~, using
the procedures described above.   Other than the occasional  replacement of a
precolumn, no unusual problems have arisen.  The precision for S203=,  SCN~, and
S04=  averages 3%  relative  (1 a) at  naturally  occurring  concentrations.  The
precision (1 a) of  the N03~ measurement  is poorer  (9% relative) at naturally
occurring levels, as  would be expected for the  low  levels  normally  encountered
(Figure 2-5).   The precision of the Cl~ measurement averages 8% (1 a),  which is
somewhat  less  than  ideal  due  to  the variable occurrence of  the interfering
carbonate dip.   Recovery of S04=, N03~, S203=, SCN~, and Cl~ spiked into retort
waters  is  normally  100% within experimental  error.   As of  this writing,
insufficient data have been gathered to  establish  statistical  parameters  for
other species.
PROTOCOL FOR MAJOR ANIONS ANALYSIS
Principle
     The major anions  in retort wastewaters are separated and quantitated by
ion chromatography,  a'form of high pressure liquid chromatography.  In this
method  the various anions  are separated on a surface-agglomerated anion
exchange resin with an eluent of sodium carbonate.   The eluent from the first
                                     2-28

-------
                                   Table 2-1
                OXIDATION BY H202 OF VARIOUS S SPECIES TO S04=
Sample No.                             S-8        S-5        S-6      10/6 Feed
Original Species
S04= (mg/1)
S203= (mg/1 )
SCN- (mg/1)
S03= (mg/1)
S= (mg/1)

15.5
45.0
7.3
50.0
50.0

18.0
50.0
7.5
100.0
100.0

18.0
32.5
6.3
50.0
50.0

33.5
24.0
5
30

Theoretical yield of S04= (mg/1)    '314        537        294         119
Measured yield of 504= (mg/1)        340        525        315         125
Measured yield of S04= (%)           108         98        107         105
                                     2-29

-------
(separator) column proceeds to a second ion exchange column in the H+ form



where the eluent is converted to the weakly ionized hydrogen form.   From the



second column the eluent proceeds to a low dead-volume electrical  conductivity



cell where the analytes are detected as their strong acids.



     For this protocol the major anions elute in the order sulfate, nitrate,



thiosulfate, and thiocyanate.  (Carbonate/bicarbonate are not detected.)



Sulfite is also detected prior to the sulfate peak but has not yet been shown



to be entirely interference free.  The earlier components (e.g.  acetate,



chloride, phosphate, nitrite) elute as an unresolved group.   Column switching



is necessary to achieve the separation described in this protocol.



Equipment



     Dionex Ion Chromatograph with auxiliary valve installed as shown in



         Figure 2-1



     Integrator - such as HP 3390



     2 - Dionex Fast Run Pre-Columns    3x150 mm                     .



     1 - Dionex Fast Run Anion Column   3x500 mm



     1 - Dionex Anion Suppressor Column 6x25 mm



     3-4 liter carboys



     1-1 liter volumetric flasks



    10 - 100 milliliter volumetric flasks



     1 - 500, 100 and 10 milliliter graduated cylinder



         10 cubic centimeter disposable syringes



         0.45 urn syringe filters



     1 - variable pipettor 100-1,000 pi



         pipettors - 10 ul and 30 pi



         3 cycle logarithmic paper
                                     2-30

-------
Reagents
     1.   0.01 N KC1  - Potassium Chloride Stock Standard
         Dry KC1  in  oven at 105° to constant weight at 20°C.   Weigh out
         0.7456 grams of KCL and add to 500 ml of distilled water in a 1 liter
         volumetric  flask.   Shake to dissolve KC1 and bring up to volume with
         distilled water.
     2.   0.001 N KC1 - Potassium Chloride Calibration Standard
         Measure 400 ml  of 0.01 N KC1 stock standard and add.to 3,500 ml
         distilled water in 4 liter carboy.   Mix solution and dilute to volume
         with distilled water.
     3.   0.007 M Na2C03
         Measure 2.3744 grams of ACS grade Na2C03 on an analytical balance.
         Add to distilled water in 4 liter carboy and dilute to volume with
         distilled water.
     4.   1 M H2S04 - Regeneration Solution
         Measure 111 ml  of concentrated sulfuric acid with graduated cylinders.
         Dilute to 4 liters in carboy using distilled water.
     5.   Anion Stock Standards - 10,000 mg/1
         a.    Chloride - measure 1.6484 grams NaCl  on an analytical balance.
              Dissolve in 100 ml volumetric flask using distilled water.
              Dilute to volume.
         b.    Sulfite - measure 1.7089 grams 98% formaldehyde sodium bisulfite
              addition complex and dissolve in 100 ml volumetric flask with
              distilled water.   Bring up to volume with distilled water.
         c.    Sulfate - measure 1.8142 grams K2S04 on an analytical balance.
              Dissolve in 100 ml volumetric and bring up to volume with
              distilled water.
                                     2-32

-------
         d.   Nitrate - measure 1.3708 grams NaN03 on an analytical balance.


              Dissolve in a 100 ml volumetric flask and bring up to volume with


              distilled water.


         e.   Thiosulfate - measure 1.4101 grams Na2S203 on an analytical


              balance.  Dissolve in a 100 ml volumetric flask and bring up to


              volume with distilled water.


         f.   Thiocyanate - measure 1.3958 grams sodium thiocyanate on an


              analytical balance.   Dissolve in a 100 ml volumetric flask and'


              bring up to volume with distilled water.


     6.   Working Standards


         1 ppm - using pipettor add 10 |jl of each anion stock standard to a


         100 ml volumetric and dilute to volume with distilled water.


         3 ppm - as above using 30 pi pipettor


         10 ppm - 100 pi each
                 »

         30 ppm - 300 pi each


         100 ppm - 1,000 (jl each


Procedure


     1.   Pretreatment of Sample.  Dilute sample if a concentration of greater


         than 100 mg/1 of any component of interest is expected.


     2.   Preliminary Procedures


         a.   Calibrate conductivity meter using 0.001 N KC1 solution with


              pre-columns, anion column and anion suppressor column out of


              line.  Reading should be 147 ± 2 pmhos/cm..  If not within


              acceptable range, follow conductivity meter instructions for


              correcting the reading.


         b.   Prepare calibration plot using the following protocol.   The


              system should be set up so that the pre-columns, the main
                                     2-32

-------
              separator column and the suppressor column are separately
              controlled (Figure 2-1).   Before injection of a standard, all
              three columns should be in the sample stream.   Four minutes after
              injection the pre-column should be taken out of line to trap the
              thiosulfate and thiocyanate on the pre-column.   Chloride,
              sulfide, sulfate and nitrate will  elute in 11 minutes.   At that
              time the main separator should be switched out of line and the
              pre-columns back in line.   The thiosulfate and thiocyanate will
              now elute.   The complete analysis takes approximately 35 minutes.
              The anion standards should be run twice for each concentration
              and the resulting peak height plotted against the concentration
              on log-log paper.   The calibration graph should be linear with a
              slope close to one.
     3.   Sample analysis.  Inject diluted sample onto sample loop through a
         0.45 ul syringe filter to remove particulate matter.  Follow the same
         procedure as for the anion standards.  The concentrations are deter-
         mined by comparing the peak heights to the calibration curve.
Interferences
     Acetate and other weakly acidic organic acids can coelute under some
conditions with chloride.  Also, a carbonate dip can occur if the carbonate
concentration in the sample is much smaller than in the eluent.  This dip
occurs just before the chloride peak and can interfere with chloride peak
height measurement.  It can be minimized by adjusting the sample carbonate
concentration to equal the eluent.  Acetate will sometimes co-elute with
chloride depending on the state of the suppressor column.  (See text).
                                     2-33

-------
     Species eluting prior to SOj are not entirely resolved, so that in the
presence of more than one of these anions the sample must be run using a weaker
eluent such as 1.8 mM NaHC03 and 1.4 mM Na2C03.
PROTOCOL FOR THIOSULFATE AND THIOCYANATE
Principle
     Thiosulfate and thiocyanate are separated and quantitated by ion
chromatography, a form of high pressure liquid chromatography.   In this method
the various anions are separated on a surface agglomerated anion exchange resin
with an eluent of sodium carbonate/Na SCN.   The eluent from the separator
column proceeds to a second ion exchange column in the H+ form where the eluent
is converted to the weakly ionized carbonic acid and the sample ions are
converted to the hydrogen form.  From the second column the eluent proceeds to
a low dead-volume electrical conductivity cell where the analytes are detected
as their ions.
Equipment
     Dionex Ion Chromatograph
     Integrator - such as HP 3390
     2 - Dionex Fast Run Pre-Columns    3x150 mm
     1 - Dionex Anion Suppressor Column 6x25 mm
     3-4 liter carboys
     1-1 liter volumetric flask
     4 - 100 milliliter volumetric flasks
     1 - 500, 100, and 10 milliliter graduated cylinder
         10 cubic centimeter disposable syringes
         0.45 urn syringe filters
                                     2-34

-------
     1 - variable pipettor 100-1,000 ul
     1 - pipettor - 10 pi  and 30 pi
         3 cycle logarithmic paper
Reagents
     1.   0.01 N KC1 - Potassium Chloride Stock Standard
         Dry KC1 in oven at 105° to  constant weight at 20°C.   Weigh out
         0.7456 grams of KC1 and add to  500 ml of distilled water in a 1 liter
         volumetric flask.   Shake to dissolve KC1 and bring up to volume with
         distilled water.
     2.   0.001 N KC1 - Potassium Chloride Calibration Standard
         Measure 400 ml of 0.01 N KC1 stock standard and add to 3,500 ml
         distilled water in 4 liter  carboy.  Mix solution and dilute to volume
         with distilled water.
     3.   0.007 M Na2C03
         Measure 2.3744 grams of ACS grade Na2C03 on an analytical balance.
         Add to distilled water in 4 liter carboy and dilute to volume with
         distilled water.
     4.   1 M H2S04 - Regeneration Solution
         Measure 111 ml of concentrated  sulfuric acid with graduated cylinders.
         Dilute to 4 liters in carboy using distilled water.
     5.   Anion Stock Standards - 10,000  ppm
         a.   Thiosulfate - measure  1.4101 grams Na2S203 on an analytical
              balance.  Dissolve in  100  ml volumetric and bring up to volume
              with distilled water.
         b.   Thiocyanate - measure  1.3958 grams NaSCN on an analytical
              balance.  Dissolve in  100  ml volumetric and bring up to volume
              with distilled water.
                                     2-35

-------
     6.   Working Standards
         1 ppm - using pipettor add 10 (jl of each anion stock standard to a
         100 ml volumetric and dilute to volume with distilled water.
         3 ppm - as above using 30 pi pipettor
         10 ppm - 100 |jl  each
         30 ppm - 300 jjl  each
         100 ppm - 1,000 nl each
Procedure
     1.   Pretreatment of Sample:  dilute sample if a concentration greater than
         100 mg/1 of any component of interest is expected.
     2.   Preliminary Procedures
         a.    Calibrate conductivity meter using 0.001 N KC1 solution with
              pre-columns, anion column and anion suppressor column out of
              line.  Reading should be 147 ± 2 umhos/cm.  If not within accept-
              able range, follow conductivity meter instructions for correcting
              the reading.
         b.    Prepare calibration graph by running the anion standard series
              twice and plotting the resultant peak heights versus the anion
              concentrations on logarithmic paper.  Note that only the two
              pre-columns are used as separator columns.  Each analysis should
              take approximately 20 minutes.
     3.   Sample Analysis:  inject diluted sample onto sample loop through a
         0.45 urn syringe filter to remove particulate matter.  Follow the same
         procedure as for the anion standards.  The actual concentrations are
         determined by comparing the peak heights to the calibration curve.
                                     2-36

-------
PROTOCOL FOR EARLY ELUTING SPECIES
Principle
     The major anions in retort wastewaters are separated and quantitated by
ion chromatography, a form of high pressure liquid chromatography.   In this
method the various anions are separated on a surface-agglomerated am"on
exchange resin with an eluent of sodium carbonate.   The eluent from the first
(separator) column proceeds to a second ion exchange column in the H+ form
where the eluent is converted to the weakly ionized hyrogen form.  From the
second column the eluent proceeds to a low dead volume electrical conductivity
cell where the analytes are detected as their strong acids.
     For this protocol the late eluters, which would otherwise bleed from the .
column during subsequent analyses, are trapped on a precolumn while the early
eluters proceed to analysis.   The precolumn is periodically flushed to waste
without upsetting the baseline from the analytical  column.   This procedure
requires that"a timed valve switching sequence be performed during the
separation.  While this valve sequence can remain unchanged, the analyst should
be prepared to adjust the eluent strength slightly (based on sample character-
istics) in order to achieve the optimum separation.
Equipment
     Dionex Ion Chromatograph with valves and columns arranged as shown in
         Figure 2-1
     Integrator - such as HP 3390
     2 - Dionex Fast Run Pre-Columns    3x150 mm
     1 - Dionex Fast Run Am"on Column   3x500 mm
     1 - Dionex Anion Suppressor Column 6x25 mm
     3-4 liter carboys
                                     2-37

-------
     1-1 liter volumetric flask
     6 - 100 milliliter volumetric flasks
     1 - 500, 100 and 10 milliliter graduated cylinder
         10 cubic centimeter disposal syringes
         0.45 urn syringe filters
     1 - variable pipettor 100-1,000 pi
     1 - pipettor - 10 ul and 30 pi
         3 cycle logarithmic paper
Reagents
     1.   0.01 N KC1 - Potassium Chloride Stock Standard
         Dry KC1 in oven at 105° to constant weight at 20°C.   Weigh
         0.7456 grams of KC1 and add to 500 ml of distilled water in a 1 liter
         volumetric flask.   Shake to dissolve KC1 and-bring to volume with
         distilled water.
     2.   0.001 N KC1 - Potassium Chloride Calibration Standard
         Measure 400 ml of 0.01 N KC1 stock standard and add to 3,500 ml
         distilled water in 4 liter carboy.  Mix solution and dilute to volume
         with distilled water.
     3.   0.003 M Na2C03 - Weak Eluent      •
         Measure 1.0176 grams of ACS grade Na2C03 on an analytical  balance.
         Add to distilled water in 4 liter carboy and dilute to volume with
         distilled water.
     4.   1 M H2S04 - Regeneration Solution
         Measure 111 ml of concentrated sulfuric acid with graduated cylinders.
         Dilute to 4 liters in carboy using distilled water.
                                     2-38

-------
     5.   Anion Stock Standards - 10,000 mg/1
         a.    Chloride - measure 1.6484 grams NaCl on an analytical balance.
              Dissolve in 100 ml volumetric using distilled water.   Dilute to
              volume.
         b.    Sulfite - measure 1.7089 grams 98% formaldehyde sodium bisulfite
              addition complex and dissolve in 100 ml volumetric flask with
              distilled water.  Bring to volume with distilled water.
         c.    Sulfate - measure 1.8142 grams K2S04 on an analytical balance.
              Dissolve in 100 ml volumetric and bring to volume with distilled
              water.
     6.   Working Standards
         1 mg/1  - using pipettor add 10 ul of each anion stock standard to a
         100 ml  volumetric and dilute to volume with distilled water.
         3 mg/1  - as above using 30 ul pipettor
         10 mg/1 - 100 pi each
         30 mg/1 - 300 ul each
         100 mg/1 - 1,000 ul each
Procedure
     1.   Pretreatment of Sample:  Dilute sample if a concentration greater than
         100 mg/1 of any component of interest is expected.
     2.   Preliminary Procedures
         a.    Calibrate conductivity meter using 0.001 N KC1 solution with
              pre-columns, anion column and anion suppressor column out of
              line.  Reading should be 147 ± 2 umhos/cm.  If not within
              acceptable range, follow conductivity meter instructions for
              correcting the reading.
                                     2-39

-------
         b.    Prepare a calibration curve using the working am"on standards.
              With the columns in line,  pump eluent through system until
              baseline stabilizes.   Zero the meter.   Flush sample loop and
              inject 1 ppm standard.   The standard run should take approxi-
              mately 15 minutes.   Complete the am"on standard series,  running
              each twice.   Plot the resulting peak height vs.  concentration on
              log-log paper.   The calibration curve should be linear and  close
              to a slope of one.
     3.   Sample Analysis
         Inject diluted sample onto sample loop through a 0.45 }jm syringe
         filter to remove particulate matter.   Determine concentrations by
         comparing the peak heights- to the calibration curve.
Interferences
     Acetate and other weakly acidic organic acids can coelute under some
conditions with chloride.   Also,  a carbonate dip can occur if the carbonate
concentration in the sample is much smaller than in the eluent.   This dip
occurs just before the chloride peak and can interfere with chloride peak
height measurement.  It can be minimized by adjusting the sample carbonate
concentration to equal the eluent.
     Phosphate, sulfite and nitrate coelute with 3 mM Na2Co3 eluent, so in the
presence of more than one of these anions the use of another eluent such  as
1.8 mM NaHC03, 2.4 mM Na2C03 is recommended.
PROTOCOL FOR TOTAL SULFUR
Principle                                                     ,
     Total sulfur in water is measured by oxidation of the sulfur species to
sulfate and quantisation of the sulfate by ion chromatography.
                                     2-40

-------
Equipment
     Electrometer - reading to 0.1 volts
     Platinum wire electrode
     Reference electrode
     Magnetic stirrer
     stir bars
     buret - 10 ml
     25 ml pipets
     100 ml beakers
     hot plate, watch glass
     100 ml volumetric
Reagents
     30% H202 (fresh)
Sample Pre-treatment
     Put 25 ml of sample into a 100 ml beaker.  Place platinum wire electrode
and reference electrode in the sample.  Connect electrodes to electrometer.
Stir the sample with a magnetic stirrer.  Note the initial electrical
potential, then begin adding 30% H202 dropwise from the buret.  Continue adding
the 30% H202 until the oxidation potential is +0.4V.   At this potential all
sulfur species will have oxidized to S04.
     Heat the oxidized sample to a slow boil, covering it with a watch glass to
prevent loss of sample.  Boil for 10 minutes to remove excess H202, then cool
to room temperature.  Pour into 100 milliliter volumetric flask.  Wash the
beaker with distilled water, pouring washes into 100 ml volumetric also.  Add
distilled water to bring volume up to mark.
                                     2-41

-------
   uioV
   UIO
=>

>-


-------
Procedure

     Analyze sample for sulfate using weak eluent.  (See procedure for early

eluters.)  Correct calculated concentration for the dilution.

REFERENCES

Anderson,  C.   1976.   Ion Chromatography:   a  new technique for  clinical
     chemistry.  Clin. Chem., 22(9):1424.

Fox, J.P.,  D.S.  Farrier,  R.E.  Poulson.   1978.  Chemical  Characterization and
     Analytical Considerations for.an In-Situ Oil Shale Process Water.  Laramie
     Energy Technology Center Report No. LETC/RI-78-7.

Hansen,  L.D.,  B.E. Richter,  O.K.  Rollins,  J.D.  Lamb,  D.J. Eutough.   1979.
     Determination  of As  and  Species   in  Environmental   Samples  by  Ion
     Chromatography.  Anal. Chem., 51(6):633.

Haas, F.C.  1980.   Analysis  of Tosco II Oil Shale Retort Water in Analysis of
     Water  Associated  with  Alternate  Fuel  Production.   L.P.  Jackso'n,
     C.C. Wright, eds.  ASTM Philadelphia, PA.

Holcombe, L.J.,  B.F.  Jones,  E.E. Ellsworth,  F.B. Meserole.   1979.   The
     Quantitative Determination  of Aqueous Solutions of  Sulfite,  Sulfate and
     Thiosulfate using the Ion Chromatograph, in Ion Chromatographic Analysis
     of  Environmental  Pollutants.   Vol.  II.   J.D.  Mulik,  F.  Sawicki, eds.  Ann
     Arbor Science, Ann Arbor.

Luthy, R.G., S.G. Bruce, Jr., R.W. Walters, D.U. Nakles.  1977.  Identification
     and  Reactions  of Cyanide and Thiocynate in Coal  Gasification Wastewaters.
     Proceedings of the  50th Annual Conference of the Water Pollution Control
     Federation.  Philadelphia, PA.  October 1977.

McFadden, K.M.,  T.R.  Garland.   1979.  Determination  of Species  in Oil Shale
     Waste  Waters  by  Ion Chromatography.  34th Regional  ACS meeting, Reckhard,
     Washington.  June 13-15, 1979.

Miner, W.  ed.   1953.   Ion Exchange  Resins in Medicine and Biological Research.
     Annals, of the New York Academy of  Sciences, 57:61.

Mulik,  J.D.,   E.  Sawicki.   ed.   1979.   Ion  Chromatographic  Analysis  of
     Environmental Pollutants, Vol.  2.   Ann Arbor Science, Ann Arbor.

Peterson,  S.   1954.   Anion Exchange Processes.   Annals of the New York Academy
     of  Sciences, 57:144.

Reimar,  III, W.   1961.   Chromatography:   Columnar Liquid-Solid Ion-Exchange
     Process,  in  Treatise  on  Analytical  Chemistry.    Part  I,  Vol. 3.
     J.M.  Kolthoff, P.J. Elving, eds.   Interscience,  NY.

Sawicki,  E. ,  J.D. Mulik,  E.  Willgenstein,  eds.   1978.   Ion Chromatographic
     Analysis  of Environmental Pollutants.  Ann Arbor Science, Ann Arbor.
                                     2-43

-------
Small, H. ,  T.S.  Stevens,   W.C.  Bauman.   1975.    Novel   Ion ' Exchange
     Chromatographic  Method Using  Conduct!metric  Detection.   Anal. Chem.,
     47:1801.

Steinle, K.   1962.   Uber die Bestandteile der Wackenroderschen Flussigkeit und
     ihren Biedungsmechanismus.  Ph.D.  dissertation.

Stevens, T.S.,  J.C.  Davis,  H.  Small.    1981.   Hollow  Fiber  Ion-Exchange
     Suppressor for Ion Chromatography.  Anal. Chem., 53:1488.

Stuber,  H.A., J.A.  Leenheer, D.S.  Farrier, 1978.   Inorganic Sulfur  Species in
     Wastewaters  from  in  Situ  Oil  Shale Processing.  J. Environ. Sci.  Health.
     Part A, A13:663-675.

Trujillo,  F.I.,  M.M.  Miller, R.K.  Shogerboe,  H.E.  Taylor,  C.H.  Grant.   1981.
     Ion Chromatographic  Determination of Thiosulfate  in Oil  Shale  Leachates.
     Anal.  Chem., 53:1944.

Wallace, J.R.   1981.   The Analysis  of Oil  Shale Wastes:  A Review.   EPA Report
     No. EPA-600/57-81-084.
                                     J& —*T

-------
                                   SECTION 3
             THE DETERMINATION OF SULFIDE IN OIL SHALE WASTEWATERS

     As with  most synthetic  fuel  projects, oil shale  retorting produces a
series of wastewaters which contain principally dissolved C02 and NH3, but also
numerous inorganic and  organic  ions.   Total dissolved  material  may be  in the
range  of  several  tens  of grams per  liter, presenting  numerous potential
problems to the analyst in terms of interferences.  Present development plans
for  oil  shale  plants  call  for "zero  discharge"  of contaminated retort
wastewaters,  so  that the  retort wastewaters must be treated for internal
re-use, a goal which requires the application  of  reliable  and rapid chemical
analyses of the process waters  before,  during,  and after the various treatment
and application steps.
     Although  sulfide is one of the species of environmental  concern, the
available evidence suggests  that the  standard methods of chemical  analysis for
sulfide are  not appropriate  fof- retort wastewaters,  or for that matter,
wastewaters from other  synthetic fossil fuel processes  (Wallace,  1981).   For
example, the iodometric method responds to any reducing agent which reacts with
iodine, including the various sulfur oxides which are found in retort waters.
Other  possible interferences  in  retort  water would include ammonia  and
unsaturated organic  compounds.   The  methylene  blue method  is also subject to
interferences  from  reducing  compounds;  in addition,  since  retort  waters are
generally highly colored and turbid,  such colorimetric  methods  are generally
contraindicated.   Because  of these interferences,  methods have been developed
for  separating sulfide  from  the rest  of the sample.   For example,  Kolthoff and
Elving (1961)  recommend acidifying the sample  and purging  the  resulting H2S
into a bubbler containing zinc acetate.   The resulting ZnS precipitate can then
                                      3-1

-------
be analyzed by  either  standard method.   Similarly, the APHA (1976) recommends
separating sulfide by  adding  zinc acetate and removing  the  ZnS precipitate.
Either separation method  is  most likely to succeed when sulfide is the only
form of S  present.   However,  for retort waters,  which contain other reduced S
compounds, the  removal of sulfide  may upset  the equilibrium  and produce
additional sulfide.   In addition,  it is  not  clear whether these  separation
techniques cleanly remove  potentially  interfering organic compounds which may
either co-distill or co-precipitate.
     These difficulties  may  explain why  Fox  et al.  (1978) obtained erratic
results in their  efforts to  measure  sulfide  in retort  water with  the
distillation/iodometric titration.   In  any case,  even  if  distillation and
precipitation procedures  may be  helpful  in the  laboratory,  they  are too
cumbersome and time consuming for field use.
     In order  to avoid  these  problems with  the standard methods,  several
investigators have turned  to  a potentiometric titration for the determination
of sulfide in complex, colored,  and  turbid wastewaters from other  sources.
These methods generally  involve  titrating with Pb, Ag, or Cd while monitoring
the precipitation with  the AgS membrane electrode, although  several  variations
have been reported in the literature.
     While any titrant  forming  a metal  sulfide precipitate could be used,  the
selectivity of the titration  with retort wastewaters  is improved by selecting a
titrant which  reacts only with  sulfide.   For  a Ag+  titrant,  Schmidt and
Punger (1971) considered a number of possible interferences, including SCN~ and
S203=, both of which occur in  retort wastewaters.  The latter two  species  were
shown to be capable of deforming the end point of the Ag+ titration.  Gruen and
Harrap (1971) also observed that the presence of thiosulfate deformed the shape
of the  sulfide  end  point.   Schwartz and  Light (1970)  explored  the utility of
                                      3-2

-------
Ag+ as  a  titrant for the determination  of  sulfide in wastewaters from a pulp
and paper  mill.   Although this titrant was  acceptable for pure solutions of
sulfide, it  did  not consistently produce a  sharp  end point with wastewaters,
presumably because  of the  high level of  complexing  and  reducing organic
compounds.    In addition,  a  silver mirror was  observed with some wastewaters,
indicating that the Ag+ had been reduced.  Schwartz and Light also investigated
Hg(II)  as  a  titrant and found  non-stoichiometric  results,  especially in the
presence of  dissolved NH3.   Florence and Farrar  (1980)  investigated Ag(I),
Hg(II), Zn(II),  Cd(II),  and  Pb(II)  as titrants using  artificial  standards.
Pb(II)  was seen  to give the  most  accurate  result based on  a  stoichiometric
reaction.
     For these  reasons,  Pb(II)  was  selected  as  the titrant of  choice  for
further evaluation.   Previous  authors  have employed  either  Pb(N03)2  or
Pb(C104)2  which  they  standardized  with a Na2H2EDTA  titration  (Baumann,  1974;
Florence and Farrar, 1980).   However, Florence and Farrar also claimed that the
Pb(II)  titration  was  not  quite stoichiometric, yielding a result 6%  lower than
would be expected based  on the formation of PbS.   This finding  led  them to
standardize  the  Pb  solution against  a previously  standardized  sulfide solution
in order to obtain the most accurate results.
     Haas  (1979)  and  Prien et  al. (1977) have reported the use  of  the AgS
electrode   for  the measurement  of  sulfide in  retort wastewaters.   Neither
reported operational  problems  such   as  drifting  or erratic results.   In
addition,  Haas1  results for sulfide agreed well with his measurements for total
sulfur, a result which is reasonable for the type of retort waters^which he was
analyzing.    On the  other  hand, neither author  reported to have examined the
possibility  of  interferences.  Neither  did  they  include data on  the range,
precision, or accuracy of their method.
                                      3-3

-------
     The objective  of  the work described herein  is,  therefore,  to rigorously


determine the  efficacy of the Pb(II) titration method for determining sulfide


in  oil  shale wastewaters.   Of specific concern  is the  effect of potential


interferences from  compounds  which are known or  suspected  to occur in retort


wastewaters, as well as the figures of merit  such as the precision,  accuracy


and range of  the  technique.  Because of many  possibilities for  interferences


due to known and unknown species in retort wastewater, a Gran's plot method was


selected for the  end point determination  (Gran,  1962).   This method determines


the equivalence point by considering several potential/volume points throughout


the titration  and  is thus less dependent on  occurrences near the equivalence


point where spurious reactions are most likely to occur.


     Since the proposed technique is to be used for the evaluation of pollution


control systems under  field conditions, it is important that the titration be


sufficiently rugged  to give reliable results under conditions which are  less


ideal  than  those  found in the average  laboratory.   The method must be reliable


and insensitive to  environmental  conditions.   It also must be rapid enough to


provide the plant  operator with analytical  data  soon enough to  evaluate and


optimize plant operation.   The ruggedness  of the  method under discussion has
                           *

therefore been evaluated  through  extensive  application under field conditions


with actual  retort water  samples.   Equally as  important as the analytical


method  is  the  sampling and  preservation  technique,  which  also has  been


investigated with fresh retort waters.


EXPERIMENTAL SECTION


     Pb(II)  titrant  was  prepared  from  Analytical   Reagent  Pb(N03)2


(Mallinckrodt,  Inc.),   at  concentrations  of 1,000 and  10,000 mg/1  of Pb.


Titrant was protected from C02 in the air with guard tubes containing ascarite.


NaI03 was primary  standard grade  from  Anachemia.   Na2S203 and starch solutions
                                      3-4

-------
were prepared from "Acculute" concentrates from Anachemia.  All other chemicals
were reagent  grade  or better unless  otherwise indicated.   Sulfide anti-oxidant
buffer (SAOB) was prepared by dissolving 80 g of NaOH and 35 g of ascorbic acid
in  1 liter of  distilled water.   Sulfide stock  solution was prepared  by
dissolving  7.0  g  of Na2S«9H20  in 100 ml  of  50% SAOB  in distilled water.
Sulfide standards were prepared by diluting the sulfide stock solution with 50%
SAOB in water.
     Electrodes were  an Orion  AgS membrane electrode  (Model 941600) and  an
Orion double  junction  reference electrode (Model 900200) with 10% w/v KN03 in
the outer  chamber.'  During  all  titrations cell voltages  were measured  with a
Keithley Model  616  digital  electrometer, which  for  the potential  range
encountered could be read to ± one mV.  Attempts were made to determine sulfide
directly from the electrode  calibration curve,  for  which a  more precise
potential  measurement was  required.   For this  purpose  the  potential  was
measured with  a  Data Technology Corporation Model 370  digital  voltmeter
connected to the analog output of the Keithley electrometer.
     Titrations were carried out by placing 50 ml  of sample in a stirred beaker
containing  50 ml  of SAOB.   The electrodes were introduced into the beaker and
the titrant [either 10,000  mg/1  or 1,000 mg/1  of  Pb(II)]  was  selected bas.ed on
the original  cell potentials in order to keep the titrant volume in the range
0.5 to 10 ml.
     For routine  application,  the cell  potential  and titrant  volume  are
recorded typically three  to four times  during the course  of the  titration, and
the equivalence point  is  determined  by  the Gran's plot technique (Gran,  1962),
either graphically or on a desk top calculator.
                                      3-5

-------
     Analysis under  field  conditions  were performed at the  North  Site  of  the
Laramie Energy Technology Center in support of the tests of various pilot scale
pollution control systems.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
     Original examination  of  the  sulfide electrode indicated that  it  gave a
linear Nernstian  response  over the range 1-1,000 mg/1 of  sulfide.   The cell
potential normally stabilized  to  within ± one mV (the limit of readability of
the electrometer) within a few seconds.   Response  time  gradually degraded  when
the electrode  was used with  retort wastewaters,  but could be restored by
burnishing the electrode surface according to the manufacturers instructions.
     First efforts with the electrode were directed to selecting a method for
determining the  end  point  for a manual  titration.   For  this  effort,  artificial
sulfide  standards  were used to establish  the shape of the  titration curve,
which was  a typical  "S"-shaped curve with  a break point of  approximately
200 mV.   With such a large break point, it was evident that the end point could
be determined by the deflection point by plotting cell  potential,  E, vs added
volume.   However, this  approach proved to be tedious,  requiring  the careful
addition of titrant near the end point and the plotting of several  data points.
     Rather than  plotting  the data, an attempt was made  to  determine the  end
point by monitoring  the cell  potential with an analog meter and observing the
sudden change  in cell  potential.   This approach  proved  to be less  reproducible
than plotting the data.
     Finally, a  Gran's plot  method was  tested  and proved  to  be  the  most
convenient for use with a manual  titration.  (The  Gran's plot method permits
the analyst to collect several data points, each consisting of a cell potential
and volume  of  added  titrant,  throughout the  midrange of  the titration.  The
volumes  added  are otherwise arbitrary, and special care  is  not required near
                                      3-6

-------
the  end point.)  For  this reason,  and  for the  reasons  discussed  in  the

introduction,  the Gran's  plot technique  was  used  for  the rest  of this

investigation.   However,  since either the deflection point  technique or the

Gran's  plot  technique  gave equivalent results,  it might be  possible  to  use the

former  technique for an  automated titrator, many of which use  derivative

techniques for end point determination.

     Three different variations of the Gran's plot method,  each of which give

equivalent results  but differ  in ease of use,  were used  throughout this

investigation.   The  first variation  used  the traditional Gran's  plot  paper

(Orion).  This  approach  required  a supply of specialized paper which was  not

always  readily  available,  and also lacked the resolution which was  sometimes

helpful in achieving the most precise results.

     For the  second  approach  the  fraction, f, of  the sulfide  which had been

titrated was  calculated  at several points throughout the titration  from the

expression:
(1)                 f =
     where     V0 = total volume in titration vessel at start of titration
               V. = volume of titrant added
               E0 = starting cell potential
               E  = cell potential
               m  = Nernstian slope

The fraction f  was  then plotted against  the  volume  of  titrant  added,  resulting

in a straight line with an intercept equal to the equivalent volume.   The third

variation was completed entirely with a Hewlett Packard model 9825A calculator,

which calculated the fraction f at each data point,  fit a least squares line to

the data pairs,  and then calculated the  end  point  and sample concentration.

(This program  is listed  in  the  Protocol  section.)  Data corresponding  to
                                      3-7

-------
0.05
-------
are shown  in  Table  3-1,  where the "simple"  matrix refers  to  standards  prepared



in SAOB  and  the "complex" matrix  is discussed  below.   For the data in  this



table the  recovery  of the 967 mg/1 sample was set equal to 100%, based on the



results of the  last paragraph, and the  remaining recoveries were calculated



therefrom.   The  recoveries  for one and five mg/1 samples differ slightly from



100%.   While  the statistical  interpretation of this data is discussed in more



detail in Appendix 3A, suffice it to say at this point that the significance of



the difference  is marginal  for the 5.8 mg/1 sample but is substantial  for the



0.967 mg/1  sample.   These data  suggest  that recovery  of the titration  is



approximately 10%  low at  1 mg/1,  and possibly  3% low at 5 mg/1.   Similar



results have  been observed by Florence and  Farrar (1980)  for low level  sulfide



titrations.   However,  from the  data  available  it is not  clear  whether the



titration actually yields low results at the mg/1 level  or the sulfide standard



is slightly  lower than expected, perhaps due to partial oxidation.   Thus, the



data  in Table 3-1 imply  that  the accuracy of the titration is at least 97% at



the five mg/1  level  and at least  87%  at the  one mg/1 level.   As  discussed  in



the previous paragraph, the accuracy is essentially 100% at higher levels.



     For the  purposes  of wastewater treatment in the  oil  shale industry,  there



is little  importance  in  determining sulfide below one mg/1,  since the  water  is



destined for  internal re-use  rather than discharge.   In fact, most samples



encountered by  the  authors during the  operation of  pilot-scale wastewater



treatment  plants at  oil  shale  facilities  contain over  100 mg/1  sulfide.



Referring  to  Table  3-1,   it is apparent  that the results for the  5.8 and



0.967 mg/1  samples  are both within 0.2 mg/1 of  the expected value,  which is



sufficiently close to satisfy this purpose.   However,  titrations below one mg/1



should be approached with caution.
                                      3-9

-------














































rH
1
OO

0>

o
ro
r-




























































^





to
LU
O
1— 1
OH
r-


P_
«^

LU
o
i— i
u_
	 i
^3
to

LL.
O

^~
rv
LU

O
O
LU
oi




































^5
a)
i.
3
01
ro
O)
s:

ai
CO
ro

at


-P
o
01
a.
X
LU























•X
•K
^
Ol >-£>

O *•*>
O
Ol
rv






C •
O
•r"
•P
ro
S-
•P
c
Ol /""^
O i —

O O)
O £

ai
•o

4!
•—
to







01
c
o

+J /""s
ro i—
j- \
•P D)
C E-
Ol s^-/
O
c
o











c
o

•p >->

s- \,
•P CD
C E
Ol ^*>
u
c
o
o








X
•r™*
s-
-p

s:





ai J-
r— Ol

^ ^
ro 3
to z,

rH rH rH
+1 +1 +1

O CM 1^-
O

cn co













CO rH
* O O
cn

+1 +1 +1

r^« *^~ co
to to «3-
cn . co
to
o







in
CM
1^. QQ
oo to
in . o
cn in
»\
•» *• CO
^* cn in
co m oo
cn

^
in *• "
to to r"»
cn to to
00
m
0












f^.
r~. o to
to oo cn
cn
in o












' Ol Ol Ol
"o. "o. "a.
E E E
•r— »r— *r—
to to to








rH CM CO



rH
+1

O
o
rH















f^»
rH

+1

to
to
cn












cn
^*
cn

*t
o
CD
O
rH

*
O
in
cn















i^
to
cn












X
a>
a.
E
O
CJ








«^-



rH
+1

CO

00
cn













CO
o
.

+1

CO
1*^
•
in










cn
to
•
in

*•
CO

.
in

VI
CO
r---

in














0
CO

in











X
ai
Q.
E
O
O








in



rH
+1

in
.
rH
cn













rH
O
.

+1

in
00
00

d







cn
cn
oo

d

M
cn

CO

C)

*\
CO

00

^3












f*^
to
C7)
.
0











X
ai
Q.
E
O









to









t
c
^£
o
.c
01

01
ai
r~
a.
E
ro
Ul

o>
O)
s-
r*
^j

ai
f
+j

c
o
•o
Ol
ro
.a

O)
O)
ro
&»
ai
>
ro

0)
jCI
•P

q-
o

r"
O
•i—
-P
ro
•^
>
ai
•a

-a
i.
ro
T3
c
ro
-p
01

Ol

o

Ol
i-
ro

c
2^
o
r"
01

o>
•r-
E
•i—
<—
i-
O
^
i.
01

ai
f*
t—

•x





Ol
<~
4^

S-
o
H—

Ol
S-
ro

01
-P
•^
pi
• |^
r^

s-
o
S-
s-
ai

Ol
f~
I—

,
S~\
£^
O
•^*
4->
ro
S-
^^
c
Ol
u
c
0
u

T3
Ol
-P
0
O)
Q.
X
Ol
SWH^
*v^
/^*N «
c  — ' 3
r—
II ro
~^
s- at
01 cn
> ro
0 i-
U O)
Ol >
o; ro

^
*
3-10

-------
     Before  the  titration  procedure  can  be applied  to  retort waters



consideration must  be  given to the potential  interfering effects of the many



compounds  in  retort water.  While  it  is not possible to  prepare artificial



standards  containing all  compounds  found in retort water, major components can



be added  to  solutions  containing known  amounts  of sulfide.  For this purpose,



sulfide standards were  prepared containing 1-1,000 mg/1  sulfide in addition to



the following levels of possible interfering compounds:   SCN~,  S20f, SOI,  C-l~,



and C0§  at a concentration  of  1,000 mg/1  were added as  their  sodium salts;



68.0 g/1  of (NH4)2C03;  and 40 g/1 of NaOH to neutralize NH| during titration.



     The results of the addition of the  possible interfering compounds is  seen



in Table 3-1 by  comparing the results obtained for the "complex" samples with



those obtained for  the  "simple" samples with  the  same  sulfide  concentration.



Any interference occurs  only in the low level sulfide and at levels of only a



few percent.  All errors due to interferences are less  than 0.1 mg/1  for  the



low level  samples   and  are  not  measurable at the  higher  levels of sulfide.



Concentrations  of   possible  interfering  compounds in  the  samples  under



consideration are larger  than normally encountered in the authors'  laboratory,



and this  implies that  errors due to these added compounds are not significant



in regard  to the treatment  of retort waters.   However,  for application of  this



technique to other wastewaters where low level measurements are more important,



it should  be  noted  that the results  for  samples  3  and  6 are statistically



different  at  the 95% confidence level.    It  is  therefore recommended  that



application of  this technique  to  samples containing less  than one mg/1  be



preceeded by additional  investigation  of possible interferences.



     At this time the  titration method has been applied to retort wastewaters



in support of tests of  various  pollution  control  systems,  including venturi



scrubbers, steam strippers,  and reverse  osmosis units;  results have been very

-------
encouraging.  Precision of  the  method when applied to the routine analysis of
retort waters containing sulfide in the range of 1-1,000 mg/1 is typically 2-3%
relative or ± 0.1 mg/1.   The  contribution  of the  electrometer  to  this  level  of
precision was examined as follows:   a Gran's plot calculation was first carried
out on  a set of titrant  volumes and cell  potentials which were  artifically
selected so as  to be  exactly  consistent, that is,  to yield  an  exactly  straight
line when plotted on  Gran's plot graph paper.  Next, the same calculation was
repeated after altering a potential by small increments while leaving all other
parameters unchanged.  This procedure resulted in a variation  of  approximately
2-3% in  the  calculated sulfide  concentration for errors of one mV in the cell
potential.   Since the electrometer used for the field measurements was readable
to only  ± one  mV,  it appears likely that  the readibility of the  electrometer
was a major contributor to the  imprecision  of the -method.   These data  also
suggest  that  using  an electrometer  capable of reporting to ±0.1  mV could
improve  the precision if  that should be needed.  The recovery as measured by
adding  known amounts  of  sulfide to the sample is 100% within the precision of
the method.
     The titration can  be carried  out routinely  with a minimum of  equipment,
and has  caused  few  problems.   The only difficulty encountered has  been with
samples  from a  steam stripper which  contained less than a few  mg/1  of  sulfide,
for which a drifting electrode potential was sometimes observed.  This made the
titration more difficult.   In order to compensate for such drift, the titration
was performed  more  rapidly than usual with apparently no ill effects  and
results were reported only to the closest one mg/1.
     Although in theory the titration can be completed without ever calibrating
the AgS electrode,  it  is helpful  to carry  out  a calibration occasionally,
perhaps  every  few weeks.   When this  is done, the calibration is stable enough
                                     3-22

-------
to permit  selection of a  titrant  of proper strength by observing  the  cell
potential at the  start  of the titration, and to  thereby  avoid titrating the
same sample  twice.   Qrder-of-magnitude agreement between  the concentrations
indicated by  the titration  and  cell potential  assures  against mistakenly
titrating a  non-sulfide species,  such  as  COf,  when sulfide  is  absent.   An
occasional  calibration  is  also  helpful in  checking for  proper  electrode
response.
     Preparation  of  standards from  solid Na2S'H20  in  a field laboratory  is
usually  inconvenient and  standards  are  not sufficiently stable to  allow for
advance  preparation  and storage  in polyethylene containers.   Concentrated
standards (11,000 mg/1)  were therefore prepared and sealed in 20 ml, pre-scored
glass vials  which are  sealed by melting  an elongated glass neck.  Before
sealing, the head space but not the  liquid  in  the  vial, was  flushed with  N2.
It was   hoped  that by  hermetically  sealing the container  and by using
concentrated solutions,  standards  would be  stable indefinitely.   In the field
laboratory standards could  be prepared  simply by diluting the contents  of the
vial.  Measurements of  solutions  stored in vials showed no  measurable  decay
over a 9 month period.   The use of standard concentrates in hermetically-sealed
glass containers is thus a promising method for storing sulfide standards.
     Performing the titration  technique on  site during various  field tests has
made  it possible  to examine  the  stability of sulfide  in  fresh  retort
wastewaters.   During normal  operation,  samples  designated  for sulfide analysis
are  buffered with 50% SAOB immediately  upon collection and are  analyzed  within
one  hour.  Select samples  were set aside for sulfide time decay measurements.
Samples  which were  filtered through a 0.45  micrometer  filter  and stored  at 4°C
in tightly sealed polyethylene bottles  were observed to lose  approximately 20%
of their sulfide  content  per day and to be essentially free of sulfide  in two
                                     3-13

-------
 weeks.   In  a separate  test,  fresh  retort  wastewaters  stored  at room
                                                       *
 temperatures  in  similar containers lost 99%  of  the sulfide within 24 hours.

 Samples  stored  in SAOB were more  stable, losing approximately 20%  in 10 days,

 mostly  in  the first two days.  While  an insufficient number of samples have

 been  examined to  draw any conclusions  regarding  the typical  decay rate of

 sulfide, it  is  clear that samples must be analyzed immediately upon collection

 to assure a  realistic  sulfide measurement.

       If  retort  waters  are analyzed promptly  upon  collection,  it is observed

 that  sulfide  is the major  form of  sulfur present.   In comparison, several other

 investigators, who did not have access  to  fresh retort waters,  have reported

 that  the major  species in retort water are S20|, S0|,  and SCN~ (Stuber et al.,

 1978).   However,  based on the data observed  in  this study it appears likely

 that  the latter species arise,  at least in part, from the oxidation of sulfide

 during storage rather  than being an original  component in retort water.

       Finally, the titration method was compared  to the direct calibration

 technique as  a  method for measuring sulfitie  in  retort  wastewater.   That is,

 does  the potential from  the AgS  electrode give an adequate  measurement of

 sulfide, assuming the  electrode to be  calibrated  with  sulfide standards?   If

 so,  the  direct calibration  technique  would  be  an  attractive  basis for a

* continuous-flow,  automated analyzer.

       Under  normal laboratory conditions  it was observed that the  electrode

 potential would vary approximately 3 mV.when  immersed in a series of solutions,

 each  containing the same sulfide concentration.  For the sulfide electrode 3 mV

 corresponds  to  an error of approximately 23%, and  an effort was  therefore made

 to define and minimize the sources of this drift.   Since temperature variations

 are  one  possible  source of error, a series  of identical  samples was analyzed
                                      3-14

-------
over the  range  of 20-30°C.   No effort was  made to control  the temperature of
the  un-immersed part of  the electrode, so  that temperature gradients were
likely.   Under  these  conditions,  a temperature change of 1°C caused a 2% error
in the  concentration  measured.   Changing the ionic strength of the solution by
approximately one mole/1 also caused the measured sulfide concentration to vary
by a few  percent.   Although all sources of  error were not  identified in this
limited effort,  it  appeared that best results could be obtained by controlling
both the temperature and ionic strength of samples and standards.
     The  principal  difficulty  with using the direct calibration technique was
the need  for  frequent calibration  with  sulfide standards.   This difficulty was
compounded because  the sulfide  standards  are unstable and  require  frequent
preparation.   In  the  final  analysis,  the direct  calibration technique proved
too time  consuming  and difficult for  routine application, although it has been
used in applications  requiring a continuous monitor.   In comparison,  the Pb
titration is  especially  attractive because  the titrant is stable Indefinitely,
thereby contributing to its reliability.
CONCLUSIONS
     The  titration  with  Pb(II)  using  an AgS  electrode as an indicator and a
Gran's plot procedure  to determine the end  point is an acceptable method for
measuring  sulfide  in  retort  wastewaters  over  the range   1-1,000 mg/1.
Significant interferences have  not been  found.   The precision of the technique
with retort wastewaters,  as applied during  routine  monitoring, is typically
2-3% relative ,or ±0.1 rag/1,  whichever  is  greater.   The data suggest that
samples containing  one mg/1 give  results  approximately 0.1 mg/1  lower  than
expected.   No bias  is observed at higher concentrations, and the accuracy of
the method is therefore limited only by the precision for  samples containing
more than 5 mg/1  of sulfide.   The titration  has  proven reliable,  simple,  and
                                     3-25

-------
rapid when  applied  under field conditions.  The titration method as described



in  this  text  is thus attractive as  a  reference method for the measurement of



sulfide  in retort wastewaters.



     In  comparison to the titration method, the direct calibration curve method



is  less  accurate and precise for routine use with a variety of samples, but may



be  appropriate  for monitoring  a series of  similar samples  under  closely



controlled conditions of temperature and ionic strength.  The main advantages



of  the direct  calibration curve technique are  that  it requires  only  a single



measurement for each  sample and it  can be  applied  as a monitor in a continuous



flow system.   However,  these advantages are  more  than offset by the  lesser



accuracy and reliability of the direct calibration method.   In  addition,  the
                 *


direct  calibration 'method   requires   frequent  calibration with  unstable



standards, while the titrant for the titration method is stable indefinitely.



     Concentrated sulfide standards  have been shown to  be stable when  stored in



SAOB in hermetically sealed vials for periods up to 9 months.   This  approach is



suggested  as  a  possible means  of providing  sulfide  standards to  field



laboratories.



RECOMMENDED METHOD FOR TOTAL SULFIDE IN RETORT WASTEWATERS



Principle



     Sulfide is titrated  with  Pb(II) using the AgS ion selective electrode as



an indicator.   The end point is determined by a Gran's  plot technique.



Reagents



     1.    Sulfide Anti-Oxidant Buffer (SAOB).   (50  ml/sample)



         ' In a 1 liter volumetric flask place 600 ml  distilled water,  80 g NaOH



          (or 175 ml of  33% w/w NaOH), and 35 g ascorbic  acid.  Dissolve  and



          bring to volume.
                                     3-16

-------
     2.   10 M NaOH.  (0-10 ml/sample)
          Dissolve  40 g  NaOH  in 100 ml volumetric  flask.   Dilute to volume.
          This  is  needed only  to  check electrode  performance and  not  for
          routine work.
     3.   Pb stock solution.  (10,000 mg/1  as Pb)
          Add 15.985 g Analytical  Reagent  grade Pb(N03)2 to a  1  liter flask.
          Dissolve and bring to volume.
               (Pb) = (0,6256)x[mass Pb(N03)2]
     4.   Pb titrant.  (1-10 ml/sample)
          Dilute the Pb  stock  solution 10:1 volumetrically, or as  needed to
          arrive at a titrant volume of 1-10 ml.
     5.   S= Stock Solution (10,000 mg/1.)
          Add 7.49 g of  AR  grade Na2S-9H20 to a 100 ml volumetric flask.  Add
          50 ml  SAOB and bring to volume with de-oxygenated, d.i.  H20.
               (S=) = 0.1335 X Na2S-9H20
          This  is  needed only  to  check electrode  performance  and  not  for
          routine work.
     6.   Standard S= Solutions,  (needed only to check electrode)
          Dilute the S=  stock solution with 50% SAOB in distilled  H20.
Equipment
     1.   2 burets, 10 ml each
     2.   250 ml beakers, 1 per sample
     3.   pH electrode and meter
     4.   AgS ion selective electrode (Orion)
     5.   Double junction reference  electrode  with  an inner filling solution
          from manufacturer and an outer filling solution of 10% w/v KN03
                                     3-17

-------
     6.   electrometer, capable of reading 800 mV to the nearest mV
     7.   10 ml graduated pipet (optional)
     8.   50 ml dispenser for SAOB
Procedure
     The procedure  as described  below is applicable  to waters  containing
sulfide in the  range  1-310 mg/1,  and minor adjustments  must be made for more
concentrated  samples.   For  samples containing  more  than  310 mg/1  it  is
convenient to  reduce  the sample volume in order to keep the  titrant  volume
within 10 ml.  Similarly, for samples containing unusually large amounts of NHJ
and HCOf (approaching  one  m/1)  it is recommended that  additional  base  be added
in the form  of 10 M NaOH.   The function  of the  additional  base is to  convert
the H2S  and HS~ to S=,  which  requires a pH  of  approximately 14.   However,
excessive amounts of  NH| and HCO| buffer  the  solution  and prevent this pH from
being attained.
     The following  procedure  is   divided into  protocols  which should  be'
performed occasionally,  perhaps every  few weeks  and during the initial set  up,
and protocols which should be  performed  during  each analysis.   Performing a
calibration  of  the  electrode every few weeks is normally sufficient to permit
the analyst  to estimate the concentration based on the original electrode
reading, and thereby to select the titrant of proper strength.
Procedures to be Performed Occasionally—
     Standardize  the  electrode.    Standardize  the stock sulfide  solution by
titrating with Pb(II)  as  described below.   Prepare  sulfide  standards by
volumetric dilution in 50% SAOB covering the range 1-1,000 mg/1.  Into a 250 ml
beaker, place  50  ml of SAOB and 50 ml  of standard solution.  Place the beaker
on a  magnetic  stirrer, immerse  the electrodes,  and  record the potential.   Plot
potential vs  concentration on  semi-log paper.   The  resulting calibration curve
                                     3-18

-------
 should  be  straight with  a  slope  close  to  30 mV per  decade change  in
 concentration.
      NaOH  requirement  for  concentrated  samples.   Add  50  ml  of  SAOB  and  50 ml  of
 sample  to  a  250 ml beaker.   Add a magnetic  stirrer and  insert the  AgS
 electrode,  the  reference electrode, and a  pH electrode.  The pH should  be close
 to  14.   If it  is not,  adjust with  10 M NaOH,  until the pH is 14 or until  the
 potential  of the  sulfide electrode stabilizes within  a few  mV.  Note the volume
 of  NaOH  required and add  the  equivalent amount to samples containing similar
 concentration of  NH| or COf.
     Drifting electrode  response.   During the analysis  of  retort waters,  the
 AgS electrode often develops a slow and  drifting  response after a few days use.
 A more rapid  response can normally be  restored by burnishing  the electrode as
 described by the manufacturer.
 Procedures to be Performed With Each Sample--
     Immediately  upon  collection  add 50 ml of  sample to 50 ml of  SAOB  in  a
 250 ml beaker.   Place  on a magnetic stirrer.   This  solution  may remain in a
 covered beaker  for  up  to an hour before titration although immediate analysis
 is preferred.    Do not  allow the sample  to stand  after collection without the
 addition of SAOB.
     Place the beaker on a magnetic stirrer, begin stirring, and insert the AgS
 and reference  electrode.   Based  on  the original  cell  potential,  select a
 titrant which  will  result  in a titrant volume of 1-10 ml.   Gradually  add
titrant with stirring.   (A black  precipitate is evident immediately after the
 addition of titrant  unless the sample is opaque.)  Stop adding the titrant at
 several  locations  and  record  the  buret reading  and  cell  potential.   Four
 readings  spaced  in  the range  2<(E-E0)<35 mV are normally an adequate number  of
 data points.
                                     3-19

-------
 Recording Data

     The  following data must  be  recorded in order to  calculate  the sulfide

 concentration:

     Once per Sample

     E0      = original potential in mV                     .

     V0      = total volume in beaker (SAOB + sample)

     Vstart  = Startin9 buret reading

     (Pb)    = titrant concentration


     Vsample = volume of Samp1e

     At each stopping point

     E  = cell potential in mV

     VB = buret reading

Calculations

     Determine the equivalence point,  V   using Gran's  Plot Paper  or by

plotting the function:

                                 (E-E0)/m
     Where V.  = titrant volume
           m  = Nernstian slope from the calibration curve = 29.5 mV at 25°C

Calculate the sulfide concentration from the equation:


                   •CS-) = V. (Pb)
                            eg.
                             H        sample

     Where (Pb) is  the  lead concentration in mg/T  and V    is  the  equivalence

point.

     Alternately,  the  calculations  can  be performed  automatically by the

following  program  designed  to  operate  on a  Hewlett Packard Model  9825

calculator.  This program  performs  a least squares fit of the function f to a

straight line and thereby  determines the V   and  the  sulfide concentration.


                                     3-20

-------
Values of f>0.95  and <0.05  are  rejected,  so  that  at  least  two  measurements  are



required which  give values of  f  in  the range 0.05  to  0.95.   This normally



corresponds  to changes  in the cell potential  in the range 1 to 35 mV.



Instructions for Gran's Plot Program



     1.    If the 9825  is off, insert the tape cartridge and turn it on.



          If the 9825  is  on,  but the program  is  not loaded, insert the tape



          cartridge and  type 'Idp 0  EXECUTE1, where  everything inside the



          quotes is typed and EXECUTE means press  the key marked EXECUTE.



          If the 9825  is on and the program is loaded,  just type 'RUN'.



     2.    If the calculator beeps and displays "error nn",  where nn are  numbers



          or letters,  start again.  If it happens  again, consult the manual.



     3.    The program  should be running and displaying  the first prompt.



     4.    The following data are entered once for  similar sample conditions:



               Date (mm/dd/yy) - .maximum of 8 characters



               Log coefficient (29.5  or other)



               V0 - displayed as "V(0)"
               Vsample "  d1sPlayed as "V(sample)"


               Pb concentration



     5.    For each sample the following items  are  requested:



               Sample ID  - maximum of 16 characters



               E0 - displayed as  E(0)



               Starting buret reading



     6.    Enter the data  points for the sample:



               E and V. (buret reading), these will  be printed.   Continue until
                      t


               there are  no more,  then just press  'CONTINUE'  when asked for the



               next value of E.
                                     3-21

-------
7.   Make any  needed  corrections.   When asked "Remove data (y/n)?", type

     'y1 or 'CONTINUE1 for yes, 'n' for no.  If no, go to Step 8.
                                                                  «t
     If you wish  to remove data,  the  prompts  are  in  the  same  order  as  for

     entering  data.   When  you have removed all the points you wish, just

     press 'CONTINUE'.

     After removing data,  you will  be asked "Enter more  data  (y/n)?".   If

     you wish  to  enter corrected data points, type 'y' °r 'CONTINUE' for

     yes, 'n'  for no.   If yes, go to Step 6.

8.   The results will  be printed.   V   is the equivalent volume, Cs is the

     calculated sample concentration and R is the correlation coefficient.

9.   If for the next sample, the data entered in Step 4 is the same, go to

     Step 5.                                       •

     If  the  data in  Step 4 should  be different,  press  'STOP'  and  then

     press 'RUN1 and go to Step 4.
                                3-22

-------
                                   Table 3-2

                              GRAN'S PLOT OUTLINE
0:  "Sulfide concentration":gto "start"
1:  "f":ret (V+T)tn"((E-C)/G)/V
2:  "Cs":ret HP(.1548/8)
3:  "yes":ret flglS or cap(Y$[l,l])="Y"
4:  "sum":
5:  S[l]+p3pl-*S[l]
6:  S[2]+p3p2^S[2]
7:  S[3]+p3plpl-»S[3]
8:  S[4]+p3p2p2+S[4]
9:  S[5]+p3plp2^S[5]
10:  N+p3^N;it N>=0;ret
11:  beep;dsp "Too many points removed.";end
12:  "regress":
13:  S[1]/N->X
14:  S[2]/N+Y
15:  (S[3]-NXX)/(N-1>L
16:  (S[4]-NYY)/(N-1>*M
17:  (S[5]-NXY)/L(N-1>B
18:  Y-BX-^A
19:  -A/B-»H

21:  ret
22:  "ent data":
23:  prt "Entered data:","E","V(t)"
24:  ent E; if flg!3;ret
25:  ENT "Burette reading?",Z
26:  if flg!3;gto -1
27:  Z-D-»T;prt E,Z;spc
28:  Jf'(E,T>F
29:  if F>.05;cll 'sum'(T,F,l)
30:  if F>.05 and F<.95;cll  -'sum1 (T,F,1-)
31:  gto -7
32:  "rmv_data":
33:  prt "Removed data:","E","V(t)"
34:  ent E; if flg!3;ret
35:  ent "Burette reading?",Z
36:  if flg!3;gto -1
37:  Z-D-»T;prt E,Z;spc
38:  'f (E,T)-»F
39:  if F>.05;cll 'sum'(T,F,-1)
40:  if F>.05 and F<.95;cll  'sum1(T,F,-1)
41:  gto -7
42:  "get_data":
43:  ell 'ent_data'
44:  ent "Remove data(y/n)?",Y$
45:  if not 'yes1;ret
46:  ell 'rmv_data'
47:  ent "Enter more data(y/n)?",Y$
48:  if 'yes1;gto -5
49:  ret

                                      3-23

-------
                              Table 3-2   (cont.)

50: "prt_hdr":
51: spc 2;wrt 16.1
52: prt "Sample:",I$
53: prt "Date:",D$
54: spc
55: wrt 16.2,G;wrt 16.3,C;wrt 16.4.V
56: wrt 16.5,J;wrt 16.6,P;wrt 16.7,D
57: spc ;ret
58: "prt results": .
59:
60:
61: fxd 5;prt "R:",R
62: wrt 16.1
63: spc 3;fxd 2;ret
64: "get_info":
65: ent "Date(mm/dd/yy)?",D$
66: ent "Log coeff?",G;if flg!3;gto +0
67: ent "V(0)?",V;if flg!3;gto +0    •     •
68: ent "V(sample)?",U;if flg!3;gto +0
69: ent "Pb cone?",P;if flg!3;gto +0
70: ret
71: "get_smpinfo":
72: ent "Sample ID?",I$
73: ent "E(0)?",C;if flg!3;gto +0
74: ent "Starting burette reading?",D;if  flg!3;gto +0
75: ret
76: "mem_init":
77: dim D$[8],I$[16],S[5],Y$[6]
78: fmt 1,16"-"
79: fmt 2,"Log coef:",f7.2
80: fmt 3,"E(0):",fll.2
81: fmt 4,"V(0):",fll.2
82: fmt 5,"V(smpl):",f8.2
83: fmt 6,"Pb conc:",f8.2
84: fmt 7,"Bur start:",f6.2
85: fmt 8,"Veg:",fl2.2
86: fmt 9,"Cs:",f!3.2
87: 0-»N;fxd 2
88: ret
89: "0->S[*]":O^S[l
90: "start":
91: ell 'mem_init'
92: ell 'get_info'
93: ell 'get_smp.info'
94: ell 'O^S[*]'
95: ell 'prtjidr'
96: ell 'get_data'
97: ell 'regress1
98: ell 'prt_results'
99: gto -6
*30484
                                     3-24

-------
REFERENCES


APHA.  1975.   Standard Methods for the  Examination  of Water and Wastewater.
     14th Edition.  Washington, DC.

Bauman, E.B.   1974.   Determination of Parts per Billion Sulfide in Water with
     the Sulfide-Selective Electrode.  Anal. Chem., 46(9):1345.

Florence, T.M.  and Y.J.  Farrar.   1980.  Titration  of Microgram Amounts of
     Sulfide with a Sulfide-Selective Electrode.  Anal. Chim. Acta, 116:175.

Fox, J.P., D.S. Farrier and R.E. Poulson.  1978.  Chemical Characterization and
     Analytical  Considerations for  an  In  Situ  Oil  Shale  Process  Water.
     LETC/RI-78/7.  Laramie Energy Technology Center,  Laramie, Wyoming.  47 pp.

Gran,  G.   1952.   Determination  of the  Equivalence  Point in Potentiometric
     Titrations, Part II.  Analyst, 77:662.

Gruen, L.C.- and  B.S.  Harrar.   1971.   A Titrimetric Method for Sulfide Analyses
     with a  Specific-Ion Electrode.   J. Soc.  of  Leather Trades  Chemists,
     55:131.

Haas,  F.C.  1979.   Analysis  of TOSCO II  Oil  Shale Retort Water,  in Analysis  of
     Waters Associated with Alternative Fuel  Production.   L.P. Jackson and
     C. C.  Wright,  eds.   American  Society  for Testing   and Materials,
     Philadelphia, PA.  p. 18.

Kolthoff, I.M.  and P.J.  Elving.   1961.  Treatise  on Analytical Chemistry,
     Part II.   Analytical  Chemistry of  the Elements,  Volume 7.   Interscience
     Publishers, New York, NY.

Prien, C.H.,  J.J.  Schmidt-Collerus,  R.E.  Pressey, C.H.  Habenicht,  K.  Gala,
     J.E.  Cotter,  D.J.  Powell, R. Sung.   1977.   Research of Sampling  and
     Analysis  Procedures:   Paraho Demonstration  Plant.   Denver  Research
     Institute Report on Contract 68-02-1881.

Stuber, H.A.,  J.A.  Leenheer,  D.S.  Farrier.   1978.   Inorganic Sulfur Species  in
     Wastewaters from  in  Situ Oil  Shale Processing.   J.  Enveron Sci.  Health.
     Part A,  A13:663-675.

Schwartz, J.L. and T.S. Light.  1970.  Analysis of Alkaline Pulping Liquor with
     Sulfide Ion-Selective Electrode, Tappi, 53(1):90.'

Volk, W.   1969.   Applied Statistics  for Engineers.   2nd Edition.   McGraw-Hill.
     New York, NY.

Wallace,   J.R.    1981.   The  Analysis  of Oil  Shale  Wastes:   A  Review.
     EPA-600/S7-81-084.   U.S.  Environmental  Protection Agency,  Cincinnati,
     Ohio.
                                     3-25

-------
                                  APPENDIX 3A


                          STATISTICAL INTERPRETATION


     This section  describes  the application of the  "t"  test to the data  in


Table 3-1.  First, consider  the standard deviation which should be associated


with each recovery.   In  theory the uncertainty in the recovery, as a quotient


of two numbers,  should  depend on the uncertainty  in both the "measured" and


"expected" concentrations (Table 3-1).   However,  the uncertainty  in  the  latter


can  be  neglected  since volumetric  dilution errors  are insignificant  in


comparison to  the errors associated  with  the  titration, and  the standard


deviation of  the recovery can  therefore  be obtained simply by dividing the


standard deviations in Column 4 by the expected concentrations.


     While this  calculation  yields  the  standard deviation based  on  a  set of


three analyses,  a more  precise estimate of  the  standard deviation can be


obtained  by  averaging all  standard deviations  in Column 4 of the table,  as


follows:



                         ~"  lilxil + s2(x2)       s2(xj
                               —A   I    —1}   ...   -—J}
(Al)                - i   fi     x^



     where s2.     = variance of the recovery for the j   sample
            J

           s2(x.) = variance of the average for the i   sample set


           x.     = average concentration for the i   sample


           R.      = recovery for the .th sample
            J                         J

Carrying out this  calculation  yields an estimated standard deviation of 0.011


for the  recovery  for all  samples.  (This value  is  reasonable in view of the


typical precision obtained with this analysis during routine application.)


     Determining whether  the  recoveries differ from unity,  or from each  other,


thus  requires  application  of the  t test  to  the  recoveries  in Column 5


(Volk, 1969).
                                     3-26

-------
     To  determine whether the  recoveries,  R,  differ  from unity,  t  is calculated


 from the expression:




 fA2)                t =  R " 1-°Q
 l/^;                L   0.011  VZ



 Referring  to  tables of the t  distribution indicates that the recovery of the


 5.80 mg/1  pure sample differs from unity with a  90%  probability  (t = 1.8).


 That is, if the recovery is actually 1.00, the probability is 10%  that t > 1.8.


 For the  0.848 mg/1  pure  sample (Sample 3), t = 7.9,  and  the recovery is not


 equal to unity with a 99.9% probability.


     The effect of  interferences can be measured by calculating  the t value for


 sample pairs i and  j:


                         R. -  R.
(A3)                t =
                          J	J
                        0.011  V2



Obviously,  no  measureable interference occurs at  a  sulfide concentration of



1,000 mg/1  (Samples  1  and 4).   For the 5.80 mg/1  samples,  t = 1.0,  also not


large enough to, conclude  that an interference exists,.   At  0.967 mg/1  (sample



pair 3 and 6),  t.= 2.4, a value that would be.exceeded in 5% of the cases if no



interference existed.  It thus appears that the results for Samples 3 and 6 are



thus (barely) significantly different.
                                     3-27

-------
                                    SECTION 4
                       TOTAL SOLUTES IN RETORT WASTEWATERS

      The measurement of total  residue,  which is defined as the mass remaining
 when' a  sample  is  dried at 103-105°C, is  performed  frequently on ground and
 surface  waters  to  determine total  solutes  in the  sample  (EPA,  1979).
 Unfortunately,  many major components of retort  waters, most notably carbonate,
 bicarbonate,  ammonia,  and  volatile organic  compounds,  are lost during  the
 drying  process.   The  traditional  residue measurement,  therefore,  is not
 normally meaningful  when  applied  to  retort wastewaters.   Nevertheless,  a
 measure  of the total solute  content  is  still  important  to  both the  wastewater
 engineer—who  needs a simple indication of  the  overall  effect of a treatment
 process—and to  the analyst—who needs  a  quality control'check for  individual
 determinations.  An alternate technique  is therefore clearly desirable.
     One  alternative method  considered  in this study,  as  well as by other
 investigators,  is  lyophilization (freeze drying), whereby  the sample  remains
 cold throughout the  drying process, only reaching room temperature (at maximum)
 at  the  moment of  total desiccation.  The residue is  then weighed as  an
 indication of dissolved residue.
     It  is widely  known that for ideal  solutions  the  colligative properties,
 such  as  boiling  point elevation,  freezing  point depression,  and  osmotic
pressure,  are  an  indication  of total solute  content.    Unlike  the  drying
procedures commonly  used for residue measurements, the colligative properties
are related to  total molality rather than to  dissolved  mass.   Nevertheless,
total  molality  provides the  wastewater  engineer with a  gross indicator  of
treatment  progress,  and therefore  can  serve much  the same purpose as the
traditional "TDS"  measurement.   Similarly,  total molality provides  a  quality
                                      4-1

-------
control  check  for the analyst, since  the  individual  components should sum to



the  total  molal  strength,  providing  that  the  major components  have been



measured correctly.   Thus,  if the colligative properties of retort wastewaters



could  be measured and related to  total  solute  strength, they would fill  much



the same role as the total residue measurement.



     This chapter  describes  efforts  to investigate both lyophilization and the



measurement of colligative properties  as an indication of total solute content.



The objective  of  the work described  below is  to develop a method for measuring



total  dissolved  material in  retort  wastewaters which  is  simple and rugged



enough to be performed in a field laboratory in support of pollution control



tests.    The analysis  should  also be  rapid enough to  provide timely  and



pertinent data to  the pollution control plant operator.  To be of most value,



the technique developed also should be applicable to other synfuel wastewaters,



most of which contain similar major components as oil  shale retort waters.



EXPERIMENTAL SECTION



     Standards  of known osmolality (osmotic strength)  were prepared from "Baker



Analyzed"  reagent-grade  NaCl  dissolved  in  de-ionized,  distilled  water.



Solutions of NH4HC03/NH3  were  prepared from  reagent grade  ammonium hydroxide



(Fisher  Scientific)  and  analytical  reagent  NH4HC03  (Mallinckrodt).   The



ammonium hydroxide was standardized by titration with  0.1 N H2S04 prepared from



Acculute concentrated standards using a pH meter to monitor the progress of the



titration.   For this  titration the pH  at the  equivalence point varies  with  the



concentration,  a factor which was taken into account.



     Retort waters  of various  types  were obtained from  the  Laramie Energy



Technology Center  (DOE),  mainly in conjunction with operations at their North



Site Facility.
                                      4-2

-------
      Selected  retort water  samples  were analyzed  on  a Digimatlc Model 3DII
 (Advanced  Instruments,  Inc.)  to  establish  repeatability with retort waters.
 This  instrument  operates  by  automatically  determining the  freezing  point
 depression  of a  sample.   Additional  freezing point depression measurements,
 including  those  listed in Table 4-1, were  obtained on a  Knauer manually
 operated  cryoscope operated  according to the  manufacturer's instructions.
 Samples were stored at 4°C from preparation  until analysis.
 RESULTS AND CONCLUSIONS
     Various  retort  water samples were analyzed  for total  dissolved residue
 using the standard drying technique at 103°C.  As expected, residue measured by
 this procedure  was  only a small  fraction  of  that expected  based  on analysis of
 the  individual  components.   Lyophilization  of  retort  waters gave  similar
 results, implying that the ammonium carbonates also evaporate under cooled,
 low temperature conditions.  To confirm this implication, solutions of ammonium
 bicarbonate and ammonium  carbonate were evaporated using both lyophilization
 and thermal drying.   With  either procedure over 98% of the dissolved material
was lost.   It  is  thus clear  that neither  lyophilization nor thermal  drying,  as
 carried out in this experiment, are appropriate for retort wastewaters.
     It is natural to ask at this point whether lyophilization carried out at a
different temperature would  more  selectively evaporate water in  comparison to
the dissolved material.  The answer to this  question can be found by examining
the vapor pressures of  water and the  major  constituents in retort water as  a
 function  of temperature.   Application of   simple  thermodynamic  formulae
 indicates that the vapor  pressure of ammonium bicarbonate,  one  of the  major
components of  retort  waters,  exceeds  the vapor  pressure  of water  at  all
temperatures above approximately -10°C, corresponding to 0.003 atm.  In  theory,
then,  lyophilization carried out well  below  -10°C could selectively evaporate
                                      4-3

-------
                              Table 4-1

              TOTAL SOLUTE BY FREEZING POINT DEPRESSION
Sample
  Ideal
Osmolality
(moles/1)
 Measured
Osmolality
  NaCl
Equivalent
(moles/1)
1.0 M NH4HC03 +

0.1 M NH4OH
   2.1
   1.90
   2.0
0.1 M NH4HC03 +

0.01 M NH4OH
   0.21
   0.216
   0.21
0.01 M NH4HC03 +

0.001 M NH4OH
   0.021
   0.021
   0.021
1.0 M NH4HC03 +

0.1 M NH4OH +

0.921 M. Acetone
   3.02
   2.64
   2.8
Omega-9 Retort Water.
                  0.58
                                 4-4

-------
water  from  retort water samples.   However, because the vapors pressure of most



organic  compounds are  less  affected by  temperature than  is  water,  as the



temperature  is lowered the  organic  compounds in retort water would  be more



selectively  evaporated than they  are  at  103°C.    It  thus  appears  that



evaporation  techniques,  regardless  of  the temperature under  which they are



carried out, are  inappropriate for retort wastewater.



     The most  common colligative  properties for measuring total  solute content



include -osmotic  pressure,   boiling  point  elevation,  and  freezing  point



depression.   The  first of these requires a semi-permeable membrane capable of



passing  water but  not the  dissolved materials.   In  the  case  of retort



wastewaters,  the  membrane must be  impermeable  to  both ammonia  and  carbon



dioxide, as well as additional organic compounds.  Most membranes are permeable



to both these gases, and for this reason osmotic pressure was not examined.



     The depression  of the  dew point, which  is equivalent to the elevation of-



the boiling  point,  can be measured by commercially-avail able instruments, one



of which was  evaluated using NaCl  standards,  NH3/NH4HC03  standards, and retort



waters.  While  the  NaCl  standards yielded  reasonable  results,  no meaningful



numbers could  be  obtained with the other samples.   In retrospect, this result



is reasonable since the proportionality between dew point depression and solute



content can  only be  expected for non-volatile  solutes  (Lewis and Randall,



1961).    Hence,  dew  point depression  (and boiling point  elevation)  are



inappropriate methods for measuring solute content of retort wastewaters.



     Freezing point  depression also  has been evaluated using  both artificial



standards and actual  retort  waters and has proven  to  be the best method  of



those tested.  Table 4-1  illustrates the  application of this  technique  to  real



and simulated  retort waters.  In this  table  ideal  osmolality refers to the



number of moles  of  solute  added,  counting  each ion separately.  Measured
                                      4-5

-------
osmolality  is  the  freezing  point depression  in  °C divided by  1.86°C,  the
freezing  point  depression per  mole  at infinite dilution.  The  measured and
ideal osmolality will agree to the extent that the sample behaves like an ideal
(i.e., infinitely  dilute)  solution.   The measured osmolality  is sufficiently
close to  the actual molal strength  for most field applications.   The  final
column in the table  shows the  concentration  of  NaCl  which gives  the  same
freezing  point depression  as  the solution under test.   Comparing the data  in
columns 2 and 4 in this table suggests that the "NaCl equivalent molarity" is a
slightly  better  indication of  total  solute content  than is  the measured
osmolality.  The measured osmolality of the retort water listed  in Table 4-1 is
also reasonable in view of published data on this  sample (Fox et al., 1978). In
conclusion,,  data  in Table 4-1  indicate  that total  solute content  in retort
waters can be measured to an accuracy of  7% relative  at concentrations  up  to
3 moles/1.   At   higher concentrations,  solution  non-ideality  may  become
increasingly  important,  and  the freezing  point  method is  therefore  not
recommended  for  such samples.   The  accuracy of most  devices  for measuring
freezing  point  depression  is  typically  ±0.001 moles/1,  which  therefore
constitutes the lower limit of this technique.
     For the purpose of checking the total  of the  individual  analyses, the data
in Table 4-1 suggest that the "NaCl  equivalent molarity" is the better measure.
Since most  species are  determined  in units  of mg/T,  they  can  be  easily
converted to  moles/1  and  compared directly  to the "NaCl equivalent".   This
approach may prove  to  be difficult with  waters  containing  high  levels of .total
organic carbon (TOC) which are not analyzed for individual  organic species.   In
this case the TOC measurement cannot be related directly to molarity.   However,
in the author's  limited  experience  in applying the freezing point method, the
organic fraction did  not appear to constitute a large molar fraction.  In any
                                      4-6

-------
case, a  high  molar organic content suggests  that  at least the major organic
species should be determined.
     Repeatability of  the  freezing point method was determined by analyzing a
variety of  retort  waters with the commercially available instrument listed in
the experimental section of this report.  Most results  could be repeated to
within ±0.001 osmols,  indicating that  adequate  precision is  available  from
commercially available instruments.  Using such instruments,  the freezing point
measurement can  be made  in a matter of  minutes  with a minimum of equipment.
The freezing point depression thus appears to be a method which could easily be
performed in  field laboratories  in support of water pollution control tests.
However,  this author  has not yet applied this test under field conditions,  nor
to a large  number  of  samples and therefore  cannot  yet attest  to its  ruggedness
and reliability under such conditions.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
     Freezing point  depression measurements  from  the Knauer  cryoscope  were
obtained by Huffman Laboratories (Wheat Ridge, Colorado).
RECOMMENDED METHOD FOR TOTAL SOLUTES IN RETORT WATER
Principle
     The freezing  point  of an ideal aqueous  solution is lowered 1.86°C  for
every mole  of solute  dissolved in one kg of  water.   The following procedure
estimates the total solute content by measuring the freezing  point depression.
Comment
     Freezing point depression is  proportional to  the  molality of the solution
at infinite  dilution  (One  molal =  one gram-mole/kg of  solvent).   However,
retort waters containing less than three moles (counting each ion and counter
ion separately) are sufficiently dilute to  give results  accurate to within a
few percent.   In addition,  at  such concentrations  the  difference between
                                      4-7

-------
molarity and  molality can  be neglected  for  the purpose of  this  analysis.

Results considered as  molarity can thus be compared  directly with the sum of

the individual determinations carried out on the sample.

Applicability

     Retort waters  containing  0.01 to 3.0 moles/1  of dissolved  material,

counting each ion separately.

Reagents

     1.    Osmolality* standard.  Prepare standards of known osmolality covering

          the range  of concentrations expected in the  samples using reagent

          grade NaCl and  de-ionized water.   The following table  is  condensed

          from more extensive data in Handbook of Chemistry and Physics:
wt %
NaCl
0.100
0.60
2.90
6.20
8.60
Total**
Molarity
(g-moles/1)
0.034
0.206
1.01
2.21
3.12
Freezing
Point
Depression
(°C)
0.062
0.358
1.729
3.837
5.512
Osmolality
0.033
0.192
0.930
." 2.063
2.964
          100 g of each standard is normally sufficient.

        * Osmolality is defined as the freezing point depression in °C divided
          by 1.86°C.

        **Total molarity = moles Na+ + moles CT~.


     2.    Standard sulfuric acid  solution,  1 N  (for  set-up only).  Prepare 11

          of standard 1.00 N H2S04  solution from pre-standardized concentrates

          available from most  supply  houses.  Alternately, H2S04 standards can

          be prepared  and  standardized according  to the directions  given  in
                                     4-8

-------
          "Standard Methods"  (APHA)  or "Methods for the  Chemical  Analysis of


          Water and Wastes" (EPA).


     3.   Aqueous  ammonia,  1 M  (needed  for set-up  only).   Dilute 67 ml of


          concentrated  (28%)  reagent,  grade  ammonium hydroxide  to 1 1 with


          d. i. H20.   Standardize by titration  with I H H2S04:  To  a 100 ml


          beaker add  25.0 ml  of aqueous ammonia and titrate to an inflection


          point (near pH = 4.6)  with H2S04 using a  pH  meter and electrode as


          indicators.   Calculate the ammonia concentration from the expression
               ,MU , _ (Volume of H2S04)(Normality of H2S04)
               (NH3)	25.0	
     4.   Instrument test  solution  (needed for initial set-up  only).   Fill  a


          1 1 volumetric flask 1/2 full with d.i.  H20.  Add 100.0 ml of aqueous


          ammonia.  Add  79.06 g of reagent grade NH4HC03  and dissolve.   Add


          29.0 g of acetone  and bring to  1 1  total  volume  with  d.i.  H20.   This


          solution has  a total  molarity  of  2.6  assuming  that the  aqueous


          ammonia is exactly 1.0 M and that complete disassociation occurs:



               Total  molarity = 1 M NH4 + 1 M HC03 + 0.1 M NH3 + 0.5 M acetone



          Prepare additional  instrument test  solutions by volumetric dilution


          with  d.i. H2p  to  cover the  range  of  interest.   Keep  all  test


          solutions refrigerated when  not in  use.   Note:   The aqueous  NH3  must


          be added before  NH4HC03  in order to avoid  the loss of  C02 from  the


          solution.


Procedure


     Most  freezing point  depression  measurements  will   be made  using


commercially-available cryoscopes, and  the manufacturer's  directions should  be
                                      4-9

-------
 followed  for this  purpose.   However, as a  minimum the cryoscope should  be

 calibrated with the NaCl standards before and during each  series  of  samples.

     It is  also  recommended that the cryoscope be checked at least once with a

 series  of "instrument  test  solutions" described above.   The  measured "NaCl

 equivalent  molarity"  should  be  within 7%  of  the  ideal  osmolality if the

 instrument is to be used for  retort waters.

 Data Reporting

     Plot the  measured freezing  point depression  (or osmolality)  vs.  the

 molarity  of the NaCl  standards.   Use  this figure  to determine  the  NaCl

 equivalent total molarity,  the total molarity of  an  NaCl  solution giving the

 same freezing point depression as the sample.   Report both the freezing point

 depression and the NaCl equivalent concentration.


 REFERENCES

 EPA.  1979.   Methods for  Chemical  Analysis of Water  and  Wastes.   EPA-600/
     4-79-020.

 Lewis,  G.N., M. Randall.   1961.   Thermodynamics.   Revised by  K.S.  Pitzer  and
     Leo Brewer.   McGraw-Hill Book Co., NY.

 Fox, J.P.,  D.S. Farrier,  R.E. Poulson.   1978.   Chemical Characterization  and
     Analytical  Considerations for  an In  Situ  Oil  Shale Process  Water.
     LETC/RI-78/7.   Laramie Energy Technology Center, Laramie, WY.

APHA.  1976.   Standard Methods.  American Public Health Association, Wash-
     ington, D.C.
                                     4-10

-------
                                   SECTION 5



                TOTAL AMMONIACAL NITROGEN IN RETORT WASTEWATERS







     Total  ammoniacal  nitrogen,  referred to here  as  t-NH3,  is typically the



predominant cationic  species  in retort water and  is frequently of interest to



pollution control  engineers.   The levels of t-NH3 found in retort wastewaters,



for example,  are  believed to inhibit biological oxidation, and such treatment



would  require  the removal and monitoring of t-NH3.   The evaluation of other



treatment  processes,  such  as reverse  osmosis  and stream  stripping,  also



requires monitoring of  t-NH3.   In addition, ammonia in retort wastewaters may



be reclaimed  and  sold to offset the  costs  of  treatment (Probstein and Gold,



1978), thereby  providing added incentive for accurate and precise measurements



of total ammoniacal nitrogen.



     For these reasons t-NH3 has been measured frequently and with a variety of



methods.  The  common  methods  include (1) direct measurement by  ion  selective



electrode,  (2)  distillation  from a  basic medium followed by  titration with



H2S04, and  (3)  automated or  manual  colorimetric procedures (Skougstad, 1979;



EPA,  1979;  APHA,  1976).   For example, Wildeman  and Hdeffner (1979)  and Prien



et al. (1977) both determined t-NH3 using method (2).   Haas employed method (1)



for the analysis  of TOSCO II  retort water.  Fox et al.  (1978) compared three



methods  for  the  analysis  of a  wastewater from  an  in situ process:



(1) distillation from a  basic  solution  into H3B03 followed by titration with



H2S04,  (2)  distillation  from  a  basic  solution  into  H3B03  followed by the



automated phenolate  finish,  and (3) direct measurement by ion  selective



electrode with  no  distillation.  Comparable  values for  t-NH3 were obtained for



all three methods, suggesting that each  one would be  appropriate  for monitoring



retort wastewaters.
                                      5-1

-------
      However, when attempting to apply these procedures  in the environment of a



 field laboratory  in  support of the simultaneous operation of various pollution



 control  systems,  it  became apparent that existing tests were unable to provide



 accurate  and reliable  results  in a timely manner.   In such an environment



 distillation  procedures  require  excessive time,  space, and equipment  and



 therefore  are  not practical.   The colorimetric procedures are generally prone



 to interferences  from organic material, alkalinity, and  turbidity, all of which



 are plentiful  in  retort waters,  and therefore  were not attempted (APHA,  1976).



 The ammonia  electrodes  manufactured by both Orion and Hnu have  been applied to



 various  retort wastewaters with  unsatisfactory  results:   the  principal



 difficulty with the electrode technique was the occurrence of erratic shifts in



 the calibration  curve.    These  shifts  were presumably  caused by high ionic



 strength  or  high  organic content of retort waters.   Due to these effects,



 results obtained  in the field with the electrode were sometimes inaccurate by a



 factor of  two.  Results could  be  obtained in the  laboratory  within a precision



 of ±  20%  (la)  only  by recalibrating after every few samples and repeating the



 analyses  whenever the calibration  shifted.   Thus, even to  obtain  results



 reliable  to  within  20%  required  an unacceptable  expenditure  of  labor  and



 excessive time periods.   Improved  techniques  for the measurement  of t-NH3  in



 retort wastewaters were clearly required.



     This  chapter describes three  parallel  efforts to  develop  a practical



method for measuring  t-NH3 in  retort wastewater.   Although not  anticipated at



 the onset,  three  different techniques  were developed,  each with  its  own



advantages and disadvantages.  The  first  is a modification  of  the electrode



technique which minimizes exposure  of the electrode to  briny,  organic-laden



 retort waters.  The  second is an  ion  chromatographic technique, which  also
                                      5-2

-------
measures Na and  K simultaneously.   The third method involves absorption of UV
radiation by gaseous NH3 which is evolved from a basic solution.
     Early observation  of  the performance of the ammonia  electrode  indicated
that while  the intercept  of  the calibration curve would  change  erratically
during a series  of samples,  the slope and  intercept  would remain relatively
constant.   The most  dramatic  changes would often occur when the electrode was
exposed to the most concentrated samples; however, such samples  could  not be
anticipated, resulting  in  frequent  recalibration  and  repetition.  The modified
electrode technique  consists  of  keeping  the electrode immersed in a low level
(e.g.  1-10 mg/1)   standard  adjusted  to the ionic  strength  recommended by the
manufacturer.   Microliter  quantities of  the sample are then added to  the
standard without removing the electrode,  and the concentration of the sample  is
determined by the  resulting  change  in electrode  potential  rather than  by the
absolute potential.  This  procedure will  be  referred  to  in this  chapter as the
sample addition technique (Orion, 1978).
     In the  ion  chromatographic  technique  the cations  in the "sample  are
separated on a low capacity,  pellicular, cation  exchange  resin  using  a weak
acid eluent.  The  eluent from the cation exchange column proceeds to a column
of anion  exchange resin  in  the  hydroxide  from where the acid  eluent  is
converted  to  water.   The eluent from  the  second  column  proceeds  to  an
electrical   conductivity detector,  where the cations  are  detected  by  the
resulting  change   in electrical  conductivity.  This  type  of  ion exchange
chromatography is  referred to in the literature as suppressed  ion  exchange
chromatography to  indicate the presence  of  the  second column,  which  suppresses
the background conductivity  of the  eluent (Mulik and Sawicki, 1979).  Because
of the chromatographic  nature of this method, the other monovalent cations in
                                      5-3

-------
retort water  are  also separated, and  It  is  common to observe Na and K during



the determination of t-NH3.



     It has long been recognized that ammonia vapor exhibits a series of strong



absorption peaks in the UV region 180-210 nm (Tannenbaum et al. , 1953; Thompson



et al., 1963).  While those peaks below 195 nm lie in the vacuum ultraviolet,



the  remaining peaks  are  easily  accessible  by instruments available  in  most



laboratories  and  would seem  to  be  an  ideal means  for measuring ammonia.



Preliminary investigation of the same references  indicated  that few serious



interferences would be  found in  retort water,  assuming that  the  ammonia  in the



water  sample  is evolved  into the gas phase by  the addition of  base.   The



absorbtivity  of ammonia  at 197 nm is approximately  five  orders  of magnitude



larger than  that of  either 02  or  H20.   The  simple  amines  exhibit broad,



relatively unstructured absorption  spectra  in the same region as ammonia.   At



the outset of this  study  it was  believed  that  such amines  would  not be present



in retort waters in sufficient quantities to cause a serious problem.



     The possibility of using the absorption spectrum of ammonia as a probe for



measuring ammonia  in  various  waters has been  investigated  by a number of



authors.   These  investigators typically added strong base to an aliquot  of



sample in a gas  bubbler,  which was  then purged  with a continuous gas stream



into an absorption cell mounted in an atomic absorption or UV spectrometer.  As



the ammonia evolved from  the basic solution, it was swept into the absorption



cell, resulting in a transient absorption peak.   Gunther et al.  (1956) were one



of the  first  to  use  this absorption  to  measure  ammonia.   Their original



observations  indicated  that the  ammonia  peaks were  sufficiently sharp to



require a spectrometer with  a band pass of  approximately  one nm  or better in



order to  achieve  a linear calibration curve. They also observed  that  the
                                      5-4

-------
ammonia would  gradually decay if left in the light path,  a result they attrib-
uted  to photodissociation.   Factors affecting the  response  of the system to
ammonia were studied by several investigators, and these were seen to be the
concentration of base added to the sample, the shape and  design of the bubbler,
the flow  rate  of the purging gas,  and the temperature (Muroski and Syty,  1980;
Cresser,  1977;  Cresser, 1976; Takahaski  et  a!.,  1980).   Thus Cresser recom-
mended that  the temperature  of  the  sample reaction vessel be controlled to
avoid excessive  errors.   Muroski and Syty also examined this method for inter-
ferences  due to  a number of  ions,  and  observed no effects due to  S03=,  I~,
N02~,  N03-, SCN~, S04=, C03=, S=, and CIT.
     In spite  of these investigations,  the  gaseous  absorption method has not
gained widespread popularity, presumably because of the ease of applying either
the electrode  method or  the automated colorimetric methods  to surface and
ground waters.    However,  the results support its  application to retort waters,
which are analyzed only with difficulty  by  the standard methods.   For this
reason the gaseous  absorption technique was pursued simultaneously with other
approaches.
EXPERIMENTAL SECTION
     Ammonium  standards were  prepared  from analytical  reagent  NH4C1 in
deionized  (d.i.),  distilled water.   All  other chemicals were  reagent  grade
unless mentioned otherwise.
Sample Addition Technique
     Measurements were made with an Orion Research (Cambridge) membrane ammonia
electrode, Model  95-10, in  conjunction with  a  Keith!ey Model 616  Digital
electrometer.   Potentials were readable to ± 0.1 mV.
     Before analyzing samples the  electrode  was first  standardized.   After the
electrode  had  been equilibrated  as  specified by  the manufacturer,  it was
                                      5-5

-------
 immersed in 50 ml of  0.1  M  NaOH in a magnetically  stirred  beaker.   10 (jl  of
 10,000 mg/1  NH4+  standard  was  added to  give a solution concentration of 2 mg/1.
 Successively larger volumes of  standard were added to calibrate the electrodes
 over  the range of 2-800 mg/1.    These data were then plotted on semi-log paper,
 producing  a straight  line at concentrations over 10 mg/1 but frequently exhib-
 iting a slight  curvature below that level.
      Before  analyzing the  samples, the electrode was rinsed and again immersed
 in  50 ml of 0.1 M NaOH.   1.0  ml  of 250 mg/1 NH4+ was added to give a concen-
 tration of 4.90 mg/1, and the cell potential was recorded in two minutes.  The
 sample was added  from  disposable pipettes,  starting with 0.01 ml and proceeding
 to  larger  aliquots,  until  a potential change of 20-30 mV occurred.  A  reading
 was recorded after one minute.  Additional  aliquots of sample were added until
 a total  change  of 40-50 mV was recorded.
      The concentration in the sample was then calculated based on the change  in
 cell  potential.   Referring to  the  calibration figure,  it  was determined what
 concentration would  have  to be  present  in  the  beaker to cause the potential
 change  observed.   Based on  this  and  the  volume  of sample injected,  the
 concentration of  NH4+  in  the original sample was  calculated.   This  procedure
was carried  out for the two data points  recorded  (at 20-30  mV  and 40-50 mV),
 and the results were averaged.
 Ion Chromatography
      Ion chromatography was performed  on  a Dionex (Sunnyvale) Model 10  ion
chromatograph equipped with a cation separator  column (#030831),   cation
pre-column (# 030830),  and cation  suppressor column  (#  030834).   Eluent was
either  5 mM  or  7.5  mM HN03 in  distilled water; detection  was  with the elec-
trical conductivity detector which comes as  standard equipment on the Model  10.
                                      5-6

-------
 Peak signals  were  processed with  a Hewlett  Packard Model 3390  digital
 integrator.   Quantisation was by peak height.
 Gaseous Absorption Methods—
      Original  investigations  of the gaseous absorption method were carried out
 with a  separate  absorption cell  and gas  evolution  chamber,  similar  in  principle
 to  the  devices  described previously  by others.   The gas  evolution chamber
 consisted  of a  155 ml  erlenmeyer  flask containing a  magnetic stirrer and
 thermometer.   The  flask  was  immersed in  a  water  bath to  maintain constant
 temperature.   The absorption  cell was a 10  cm  heated quartz cell mounted in a
 Beckman Model  DK2-A ratio recording spectrophotometer.   The headspace over the
 sample  in  the erlenmeyer  flask  was  circulated  through the  absorption  cell and
 returned to  the  flask with a variable speed diaphragm pump (Bendix Model BDX44
 Super Sampler).   In practice, 50 ml  of the sample  or standard was placed in the
 flask,  5 ml  of 50%, w/w  NaOH was added, and the flask was  immediately sealed.
 Stirring was initiated and the headspace gas  was recirculated through the
 absorption cell  until a constant value was obtained.
     Although  this  device was  used for  several  preliminary  experiments,
 limitations  soon became  apparent.   The temperature equilibration was  too slow,
 the  apparatus  needlessly  complex,  and the measurement cycle  too slow.   In
 addition, a somewhat better precision and accuracy was judged to be desirable.
 For these reasons the majority of work was carried out with the device shown in
 Figure 5-1,  which  combined  gas evolution,  temperature equilibration,  and
 absorption measurement  into a single cell.  This  device  was mounted  in the
 sample chamber of a Gary Model 219 UV/visible  spectrometer so  that the  light
path passed  through the  fused silica (Suprasil, Heraeus Amersil)  windows shown
 in  the   figure (70 mm  path length).   Rapid  temperature equilibration was
 achieved by circulating water  from a temperature bath through the coils
                                      5-7

-------
   THERMISTER
                               SAMPLE INTRODUCTION
                                          HEATED TOP HAT
                                           SAMPLE CONTAINER
                                              HEATING FLUID
                                            STIRRING MOTOR
                                                     BASE PLATE
                                                    CLAMPS
                             FIGURE 5-1

Sample cell for measuring the  uv absorption  of gaseous  NH
                       over  a liquid sample                      '-
                               5-8

-------
 soldered to the chamber  body,  which was constructed from  a stainless steel,
 125 ml  beaker.  Total chamber  volume is approximately  150  ml.   The top hat in
 the figure serves to  prevent condensation on the windows  or window mounting
 block,  a feature which  is  necessary for work with heated samples.   The window
 mounting block was  constructed of  acrylic,  although  it is recommended that
 future  models be made from  light metal  in order to improve  the  rate of  temper-
 ature equilibration of the  cell.   Stirring  of the sample is achieved with the
 water driven  stirring motor shown  coupled to a magnetic  stirring  bar.
 Temperature of either the  solution  or headspace  is made with  the  thermister
 shown.   All connections  for heating fluid, sample  injection, etc. are made with
 tubing  through a  demountable wall  on the spectrometer,  so that the  spectrometer
 sample  area need  not be  opened  once the sample chamber  is installed.
      The sample chamber  is  mounted  in the spectrometer and  heating  fluid is
 circulated  until  temperature equilibration is achieved.   Approximately 30  ml of
 sample  or  standard  is injected followed  with 3 ml  of 10 M NaOH,  both  with
 plastic  disposable syringes.  After  the ammonia has  equilibrated between the
_vapor and  aqueous  phase, the  absorption  of  the  gaseous NH3 at 197  nm is
 measured,  either  by scanning across  the 197 nm peak or by remaining fixed at
 the peak maxima.   All measurements  were made with a fixed bandpass of 0.6 nm
 with the spectrometer  operated  in  the double beam  mode.
 RESULTS  AND DISCUSSION
 Sample Addition Method
      At  the onset of  this  investigation various approaches were attempted in
 order to minimize  the effect of  the drifting intercept of the  calibration
 curve.   The first attempt avoided the use of a calibration curve entirely.  As
 with the other procedures,  this  procedure  began  by immersing the electrode  in  a
 5  mg/1  NHJ/0.1 M NaOH standard.   Aliquots of the sample were  then added  to
                                      5-9

-------
 effect  potential  changes of approximately 20 and 40 mV.   Potential and volumes



 were  recorded  at each of the three data points, including the 5 mg/1 standard.



 Based on  these three data pairs,  it  is possible in theory  to  calculate the



 concentration  in the original sample by using the Nernst equation  in the form





 (1)       E -  E  = m log £-

               °         Lo




          r    Co Vo - Vs Cs


                 Vo - Vs



          m =  slope (constant)



         V  =  volume of sample added



         VQ =  original volume of standard



         C  -  concentration in the sample
          o


         CQ =  concentration of the original standard (i.e., 5 mg/1)



         EQ =  cell potential for the original standard



          E =  cell potential after sample addition





and solving for C .   Here the known quantities are E ,  C , V , and two pairs of



E and V ,  and  the objective is to  solve  for m and C .   This calculation was
        s                                             s


carried out by numerical  iteration  on  a Hewlett Packard  9825 desk top  computer



to a precision of 0.1% relative.



     Although  computational errors  were reduced to  negligible amounts,  results



of this procedure were  erratic, the concentration often  varying  by a factor  of



two for sequential  measurements of the same  sample.   For this  reason  the



sensitivity of the calculated  result  to errors  in  the measured  potential was



determined by  artificially  varying  the potential which was  entered into the



calculation.    It was observed  that 1.0 mV error in  a 10 mV  potential  change



caused  an error  in the  calculated concentration of  94%  relative;  an error of



1.0 mV  in  a  20 mV change,  an error of 30% relative.   Since the  electrode
                                     5-10

-------
potential cannot  be  measured to better than ±  one or two mV due to drifting



responses, this approach was abandoned.



     The first attempt to incorporate a standard curve into the sample addition



technique used the  same procedure as described in the Experimental section of



this chapter, except that the  calibration  curve was  assumed to  be  linear (on  a



semi-log plot).   With  this  assumption  the  sample  concentration  is  still  calcu-



lated  based  on equation 1,  except that m  is  fixed  and is obtained from  a



previously obtained  calibration  curve.   Fixing m results in a greatly simpli-



fied calculation  which  can  be  carried out with a pocket calculator.  However,



it soon  became apparent that the calibration curve obtained in the laboratory



with pure  standards exhibited  sufficient  curvature at  concentrations  below



10 mg/1  to  cause a  major source  of error.  This  approach was therefore



abandoned in  favor  of the method described in  the Experimental  section  using  a



plot of  the  calibration  curve  to  calculate the  relative  concentrations.



However,  the  approach described  above would result in  no  loss in accuracy



should the calibration  curve prove linear down to 5 mg/1, as is sometimes the



case.   The  simplified calculation  possible with  this  procedure  results in



significant time savings to the analyst.



     The remaining measurements  with the sample addition technique were made



using  the  calibration curve as  described  in the Experimental  section.  The



precision of  this method  was estimated by  analyzing  12 oil shale retort and



synthetic fuel wastewaters  in  duplicate.   Each  individual determination  itself



consisted of  the  average  of two measurements made after two separate sample



additions.   The average difference between each (averaged) determination was 6%



relative.  However,  this  estimate of precision is probably overly optimistic



since  duplicates  were  measured sequentially, and  perhaps more  importantly,  the



same quantities of sample were added during each analysis.  Another estimate of
                                     5-11

-------
 the  precision can be obtained  by  examining the two concentrations which were
 averaged  to obtain the  individual  results.   Examining 24 such data pairs yields
 an  average difference of 17%, with an average precision of 17/V2 = 12% for the
 average of two determinations.   Thus, the precision for an individual determi-
 nation,  consisting  of  the  average  resulting  from two sequential  sample
 additions  is  6-12% (la).
     The  lower range of the sample addition technique is limited by the neces-
 sity of adding sufficient sample  to  cause  a shift  in potential which is large
 enough to  measure accurately, while at the same time not adding so much sample
 that the  matrix of the resulting solution is changed.   Referring to equation 1
 and setting CQ =  5 mg/1, AE = 40 mV,  and the maximum value for V  = 5.0 ml, one
 calculates  a   minimum  value  for the  sample  concentration,  C  = 210 mg/1.
 Decreasing CQ or  increasing V  both improve the lower limit, albeit at the cost
 of poorer performance  since  the electrode is  less  stable  at  lower concen-
 trations and  is also affected by changes in the matrix of the sample.
 Ion Chromatography
     Figure 5-2 is included  to  illustrate several features of the ion chroma-
 tographic  determination  of   ammonia  and  other ions  in retort  waters.
 Figure 5-2a shows the  elution of Na+, NHJ, and K+ using a 7.5 mM HN03 eluent.
 NHJ and  K+ elute close enough  to  interfere if either are  present in large
 excess.   For this reason, among others, quantitation was accomplished with peak
 height measurements, which are  less sensitive  than  peak  area to  the  occurrence
 of nearby  peaks.   Fortunately,  K+  is not  normally  observed  in  retort waste-
waters and the  chromatogram  shown  in Figure 5-2b is  typical of  those encoun-
 tered.   Both  NH|  and  K+N+  are  clearly  resolved  and can be quantitated  if
 desired.    Figure  5-2c shows  a chromatogram for a  10 mg/1 standard  of Na+,  NHJ,
 and K+ obtained with a 5 mM HN03 eluent.   The improved resolution between NHJ
                                     5-12

-------
 Start
               I4min
                                                          .<
                                                  Start       22min
Start
I4min
                                                  i—ft
                                                  Start
                                                         No"1
                                                               28min
                         FIGURE 5-2
           Ion Chronidtoqrams of  Na+,  NH.+ and  K+
                             5-13

-------
 and  K+  resulting  from  the  weaker eluent  is readily  apparent,  and the
 determination of these three  species  in the same sample is feasible,  assuming
 the absence of unknown interferences.   Methyl amine elutes immediately after
 the NH|  peak, and interferences due to amines should be considered in samples
 such as  retort waters  containing high  levels of organic  material.   However,  the
 retort  waters analyzed in the authors' laboratory have shown no peak following
 the NH| peak,  suggesting that  amines  are  not a problem in these waters.
 Figure 5-2d  shows a chromatogram of leachate from burned,  spent shale.   Na+,
 K+,  and  a trace of  NH| are clearly  separated and  were reported.
      The  ion chromatographic  method  has  been used  routinely  in support of
 various  field tests for a year,  and during this  time has performed with few
 problems.   However, a gradual deterioration of column  performance was noted
 over  this time, especially during the analysis  of leachate samples.  The latter
 effect is  likely  due to the  occurrence of large concentrations of alkali  earth
 elements  in  the  leachate which  are difficult to  remove  from  the analytical
 column.   Periodic treatment with sodium tartate eluent temporarily improves but
 does  not  restore  entirely column performance.  It is  recommended,  therefore,
 that  additional precautions  be included for  such samples.   For example,  more
 frequent changing of the pre-column may eliminate degradation of the analytical
 column due to divalent cations.   Most experience with the ion chromatographic
 system has been with  condensates from pilot-scale oil shale retorts and  such
waters have  shown  little effect on the  column.   Column manufacturers now
 recommend the  use of  HC1  instead of the  HN03 eluent as  a means  of  prolonging
column life.
     Statistical  performance  criteria,  of  course,  depend  on  the  exact
conditions of the analyses and vary between  location, environmental conditions
and  operator.   However,  the following  has  been  typical of  the authors'
                                     5-14

-------
experience.  During a two week field test the ion chromatograph was operated in
an  unheated laboratory where  temperatures  fluctuated  widely.   During this
period 65 samples were analyzed in duplicate for NH^ with an average difference
of  2.3%.    This  difference is  somewhat optimistic for such environmental
conditions, since  sample  pairs were analyzed in immediate sequence rather than
at  different times.   For  samples analyzed  in the  laboratory the recovery has
averaged  104%  (n = 4),  not  significantly different  than unity.  The  main
limitation  to  reproductibility has  been a drifting response,  perhaps  due to
temperature fluctuations,  and a  slight shift in calibration  upon switching
suppressor  columns, problems  which  may be minimized in the future by thermally
controlling the detector and installing a fiber suppressor column, which can be
used continuously.  For determination  of Na+ and K+  in leachate, the  average
difference  for 6 pairs of  samples  selected  at random  was  5.2%  and  5.8%
respectively.   Again, the  principle limitation  for these  species has  been a
drifting response which occurs as the  analytical column is exposed to  the high
Ga and Mg levels expected in leachate samples.
     The dynamic  range  for NH| is approximately from 1-300 mg/1, although the
calibration curve is non-linear throughout parts of this region.  Below ~5 mg/1
the peak  height  is  proportional  to concentration,  while above  vLO mg/1 peak
height is  proportional  to ~(NH3)-5~-6.  This is reasonable for  a weak base
which is only partially ionized in the detector.
Gas Absorption Method
     Experiments were performed with the  first  device described in the  Experi-
mental  Section (separate  absorption and gas  evolution chambers)  to assess  in a
preliminary manner  the  feasibility of the gaseous  absorption technique.
Characteristics of the spectra obtained with standard  solutions and real retort
wastewaters were initially observed.  As expected,  artificial standards yielded
                                     5-15

-------
spectra with  a series of sharp peaks from approximately 210-197 nm (the vacuum
uv, cutoff  for the instrument in use).  More importantly, with retort waters a
clean  ammonia spectrum was observed with no apparent interfering peaks.  This
observation was  especially important because organic compounds absorb in this
spectral region, and it was of obvious concern that organic compounds in retort
water  would evolve  and interfere significantly.  Closer examination for other
absorbing  species involved suppression of the ammonia  spectrum  by acidifying
the samples with HC1  to a pH  of  approximately  3.   Under these conditions no
absorption was  observed  in the region 210-197 nm, except for one sample which
exhibited an  intense absorption spectrum consisting of a series of sharp peaks.
Based on the appearance of the spectrum (Thompson et al., 1963), as well as the
fact that  it  disappeared when the sample was made  basic,  this  absorption  was
assigned to S02.  This assignment is also supported by the common occurrence in
retort waters of thiosulfate, which  decomposes  to  S02 upon the addition  of
acid.   Preliminary  investigation based on  a limited number of samples  thus
indicated that  retort  waters  when made basic by the addition of NaOH,  yielded
an easily observed ammonia spectrum free of obvious interfering peaks.
     Next,  a  calibration  curve  was  established  using standards over the range
3-300 mg/1, and  was observed  to  be  linear over  this  range  but curved at  higher
concentrations.  Using this curve, three retort  water samples were analyzed for
ammonia.   Results compared reasonably with previous analyses by electrode.
     Using this  same  device the  importance  of  temperature control was  also
established by  comparing  the  absorbance of  a 100 mg/1  standard over a range of
temperatures  (Figure 5-3).  At 50°C  a change of 1°C was  seen  to cause a  3%
change in absorbance,  a major source of error, especially since the addition of
NaOH to the sample  often caused a temperature  increase  of 5-10°C, which was
only slowly dissipated.
                                     5-16

-------
   0.8
   0.6
8
CO
QZ
O
CO
aa
0.4
   0.2
                  Effect of Temperature of Cell on the
                  Absorbance at 197.35 nm of a lOOppm
                  NH3 Standard
      0
            10
20
30
                                             40
                                                    50
                                        60
                                        70
                                  CELL TEMPERATURE

                                    FIGURE  5-3
       Effect  of cell temperature on response.   (Standard  concentration  =
       100 mg/1  NH3, absorption wavelength  =  197.4 nm)
                                  5-1?

-------
      This implied that better temperature control was required.   In addition, a
 more rapid  method of  changing  samples was  required to make this  approach
 practical.   For these reasons attempts were made to construct a  continuous flow
 system  which  would  automatically  enter  the sample, meter  the reagents,
 equilibrate  the temperature, and transfer the gaseous headspace sample to the
 absorption  cell.   Such  a  device,  modeled  after the automated Hg method
 described in the  EPA  (1979)  handbook was  assembled,  including a  constant
 temperature  bath to maintain temperature  control  to better than ±  1°C.   While
 this  device  worked well  for standards  and  even some retort  waters,  it  failed  as
 a  general technique for retort waters due to a persistent foaming problem with
 some  retort  waters which prevented the  complete separation of  gas  and water
 phases.   This  caused  liquid  sample  and  reagent  to be  carried into  the
 absorption  cell, resulting  in  a worthless  spectrum and a lengthy  cleaning
 process.   Several   defoaming agents,  such  as  anti-foam B (Alpkern Corp.,
 Portland),  and  mechanical  separators  of  various  size and design  including
 hydrophobic  filters were evaluated,  but none proved adequate for all samples.
 Because the  foaming of one  sample invalidated the results  for all  subsequent
 samples,  the continuous flow approach was  abandoned in favor of  apparatus shown
 in Figure 5-1.
     The  cell shown in Figure 5-1 was designed  to'(1) minimize  the effect of
 foaming,  and (2) improve the rate of  temperature  equilibration.  The sample
 container in  this  cell  is made  from  0,025" thick stainless  steel as opposed to
 the standard  laboratory glassware used in  the original  device.   The new sample
container achieved  temperature equilibration  for a 30 ml  sample in a  few
minutes.
     Tolerance  to  foamy materials was  tested with several  samples  known  to
 readily produce  stable foams, which  were introduced  into  the  chamber  and
                                     5-18

-------
 treated normally.  Samples  for  this  purpose included 5% Joy dish detergent in
 water, 5% Joy + 5% vacuum  oil  in water,  0.07% sodium dodecylsulfate in water,
 0.07% sodium  dodecylsulfate + 1% 3-in-l household  oil, and  several  retort
 waters from a variety  of  sources.   No problems with  foaming were encountered
 with any  of  these samples,  although  water  could  be splashed onto  the cell
 windows  if the magnetic stirrer were operated too fast.   This  cell  also over-
 comes certain disadvantages which  have been reported by previous authors for
 similar  flow through devices designed for measuring t-NH3 by gas phase absorp-
 tion (Muroski  and Syty, 1980; Cresser, 1977;  Takahaski et al., 1980).  While
 the  response  of flow-through systems  depends  on the  gas  flow  rate,  no similar
 phenomenon occurs with  the static cell.   More importantly, the response is
 relatively insensitive  to the exact volumes  of NaOH and  sample which are  added.
 Although  the  samples  were introduced only with the precision achievable with a
 plastic,  disposable  syringe, the precision of the final analysis was still the
 the  best of the methods tested.   (See  below.)  All results discussed below were
 thus  obtained  using this sample  cell.
      Certain  apparent problems   should be corrected  in future  designs.  When
 first  placed  in  the  spectrometer,  the cell  required two hours to stabilize at
 the  desired temperature for analysis.  Sample introduced before this period
would  condense on the windows,  where  it  would remain for hours.  This long
 initial warm  up  was  ascribed to  the  thermally large  window mount, which was
made  from  16 mm  thick acrylic.   A window  mount constructed from more thermally
conductive material would  be preferable in the future.  In addition, the flat
bottomed cell  did  not drain thoroughly between samples,  requiring both water
and  sample rinses to  obtain accurate results.   This could be  improved  by
changing the shape of the  cell  bottom.  The stirring mechanism was not suffi-
ciently  reliable  for  routine use  and would  occasionally  stop.  Thus,  a
                                     5-29

-------
mechanically-driven  stirrer or a more strongly coupled magnetic stirrer, would



appear to be preferable to  the design  used  in this model.



     Figure 5-4  shows the  spectrum of a 100 mg/1  NH£ standard over the range



210-188 nm.  As  can  be seen, the peaks become increasingly more sensitive with



decreasing wavelength.  Although not obvious from the figure, the noise level



also  increases  below  197 nm,  making  this  region  less desirable.  Possible



advantages of using  shorter wavelengths were investigated by first flushing the



Cary 219 spectrometer with  dry nitrogen evolved from  a  liquid nitrogen tank.



However, the lines below 197 nm still  tended to be noisier than those of longer



wavelength.  Background  absorption also becomes increasingly  important below



approximately  200 nm.  For example,  when  deionized, distilled water  is



introduced into  the  cell  at 60°C, a  spectrum  is  observed in which  absorption



increases with decreasing wavelength and results in an absorption of 0.004 at



197 nm.    Qualitatively,   this  matches  the  reported  spectrum  of  water



(Thompson e't.  al., 1963).   Since  the absorbtivity of water increases approxi-



mately ten fold  for  every 5 nm decrease in  wavelength  in  tfciis  spectral  region,



the use of wavelengths below 197 nm does not appear promising.  The remaining



experiments discussed  in  this  report were thus  performed  using the  197  nm  peak



(spectrometer setting = 197.35 nm) and a band pass of  0.6 nm which  represented



a compromise between maximum sensitivity and minimum noise.



     Three slightly  different  calibration curves  are shown  in  Figure 5-5  for



the concentration  range 1-1,000  mg/1.   The  first curve was  obtained with  the



cell at 50°C using the total height of the  197 nm peak.   The second curve was



obtained at a cell  temperature of 60°C  using the  same procedure.  The  third



curve was determined by measuring the height of the 197  nm peak above  a base-



line drawn between the two adjacent valleys  to better reject any absorption due



to broad-band interfering peaks.   The figure illustrates  that the calibration
                                     5-20

-------
                              NH, SPECTRUM
i     ill    i     t    i    i     i     t     i
                  WAVELENGTH (nm)

                   FIGURE 5-4
 Spectrum of NHo in equilibrium with 100 mg/1 of
       NH4+..at 60 C.   (band pass = .0.6 nm)'
                      5-21

-------
                                                                             o
                                                                             o
                                                                             o
                                                                             o
                                                                             o
                                                                             o
                                                                             o
                                                                                       4-3
                                                                                       Q.
                                                                                       S-
                                                                                       o
                                                                                        in
                                                                                        =3
                                                                                        O
                                                                                        O)
                                                                                        tfl
                                                                                        (O
                                                                                        01
                                                                             o
                                                                             o
 o
 p
 o
                                                                                       -M
                                                                                       J3
                                                                                       O

                                                                                       in
                                                                                       OJ
                                                                                       >

                                                                                       3
                                                                                       O

                                                                                       c
                                                                                       o
                                                                                       us
I I I  I  I  I  I
                          I I I
 o
 o
-o
                         O
                         o
                        (Wrfd) NOIlVyiNHONOO  CHN
                                    5-22

-------
curve  is  linear  from 1-100 mg/1,  but slight curvature is apparent at 300 mg/1.



Nevertheless, the  curve  is usable over the  entire  range except that concen-



trations  above 330 mg/1  are not  accessible at 60°C.   The importance of temper-



ature  in  this  analysis suggests  that the  range could be adjusted to both lower



and higher  concentrations  by adjusting the temperature appropriately.   Consid-



erably higher concentration could also be measured  using a cell  with a shorter



absorption pathlength.



     In developing this procedure,  the importance  of technical procedures



become apparent.   These  included the necessity of choosing a stirring bar of



the proper  size (ca  15 mm)  to provide reliable  stirring, and  selecting  a



stirring  rate which was fast enough yet did not splash liquid onto the windows.



The rinsing procedure between samples  could  also affect the results,  and a



rinse with  deionized  water followed by a rinse with the next sample was found



to be necessary for reliable results.



     Many retort wastewaters  contain a high content of dissolved ions and the



gas absorption technique was,  therefore,  tested  for  its  ability to tolerate



samples of  high  ionic strength.   Standards of  33 and 100 mg/1  were prepared



with and  without the  addition  of  strong electrolyte  (NaCl  at  47  g/1  and Na2S04



at 8 g/1).  When the  absorption  of these  samples was compared,  no  difference



was observed.  Thus,  the gas  absorption technique appears  to  be  insensitive to



the occurrence of  strong  electrolytes at ionic strengths  far exceeding that



expected  in retort waters.



     Another major interest in testing the gas absorption method was evaluating



its ability to  analyze solutions  containing  high levels of  surfactants  and



oils.   The  tolerance  of the other two  methods  discussed in this report  for



surfactants and oils is limited due to fouling of the electrode membrane and to



degradation of the chromatograph  column.   Thus, attempts were made to analyze
                                     5-23

-------
 solutions containing 100 mg/1 of  NH3  and the same  levels  of  surfactants and
 oils used to test the cell  with  regard to its ability to tolerate foamy samples
 (see above).   These  samples contained  more oil  and surfactant than would
 normally be expected in a  retort water  sample and would form a separated layer
 if allowed to  stand  for a  minute.   Success  with these samples would therefore
 imply more than sufficient  tolerance to  analyze  retort water samples.   Unfortu-
 nately,  the analysis  of such samples gave  rise  to certain  problems.   The
 equilibration  time was  excessively long, often requiring 30  minutes.   Oils
 caused  a broadband absorption which was 30-50%  of the NH3 absorption.   (This
 was  subtracted by acidifying the  sample to  pH 3 and measuring the absorption
 before  adding  the base.)  The oil  often left a residue which required flushing
 out  by  pulling room air through the cell  until  the  absorption decreased. Most
 importantly, when the organic background was  subtracted, the absorbance was too
 low  for  the  concentration of 
-------
(one standard  deviation).   Precision of the second method, identically deter-
mined, was  0.6% relative.   The recovery  for  the two methods was  103.6%  and
99.3% respectively.   The  detection limit of'the gas absorption  method,  defined
as three times the background noise, was determined by measuring the absorbance
of a  pure water  sample six  times.   The detection limit so  calculated was
0.24 mg/1 of  NH3.  Prudent  laboratory practice would thus permit reporting
concentrations over approximately 3 mg/1.
Comparison of-Methods
     In  order  to  establish the  veracity of  a technique,  it  is  clearly
advantageous to  compare  the results  obtained on  identical  samples  using
independent techniques.  This  was done for a  set  of 12  samples consisting of
oil shale  retort wastewaters  as  well  as  a tar  sands wastewater  and coal
gasification condensate using the methods discussed  in  this  chapter.   These
results  are  tabulated  in  Table 5-1.   Waters  listed  in  this  table are from
various  field  tests and interlaboratory comparison studies ("round robins").
However the waters are not necessarily representative of the process listed but
should cover the  spectrum  of sample types  expected during the treatment of oil
shale retort and synfuel wastewaters.  Results of the two variations of the gas
absorption method are  listed, the "single" heading  and the  "scan"  heading
referring to the  total  absorption and peak-above-valley variations discussed
previously.
     For the purposes  of  interpretating the  data  in this table,  the ion
chromatographic method  was  used as a reference to which  the other results are
compared.  The average  difference listed on the bottom row was  then calculated
according to the expression
                                2    n   |xx -  x2.l1
                                "1=1
                                     5-25

-------
                               Table 5-1



COMPARISON OF AMMONIACAL N MEASUREMENTS OBTAINED BY INDEPENDENT METHODS

Concentration (mg/1 as NH3)
Gas Absorption
Sample
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Average
Description
Mixed feedwater to steam
stripper, 10/6/81
Mixed effluent from steam
stripper, 10/6/81
Geokinetics #17
Dilute Paraho
Oxy-6
S-7, reflux from steam stripper
Concentrate from reverse
osmosis treatment
S-ll, reflux from steam
stripper
S-3, reflux from steam stripper
Omega-9 (3,125)
Tar sands wastewater
Condensate from coal
gasification
di f f erence
Sample
Addition
895
441
2,128
6,736
8,197
11,290
4,702
12,934
18,282
3,595
73
3,903
12%
Ion
Chromatography
725
370
2,200
6,000
8,500
10,200
3,700
12,000
17,500
3,300
55
4,000
0.0%
Single
780
405
2,300
6,400
8,600
11,000
4,400
, 14,800
19,800
3,600
102
4,200
13%
Scan
720
325
2,150
6,250
8,400
9,800
4,200
12,000
17,000
3,450
50
4,200
5%
•,
                                5-26

-------
The average difference for the sample addition method is reasonable considering



the precision  of the two methods involved in the calculation.   Furthermore,  no



systematic bias  is  apparent, and the accuracy of the standard addition method



is therefore  limited by its  precision.   Similar statements can be made for the



scanning variation  of the gas absorption method, except that agreement of this



method to the  ion chromatographic method is better.  The five percent agreement



between these  two  methods suggests that both  are  accurate to that amount or



better.  However, the single wavelength variation  of the gas absorption method



clearly gives  results which  are biased high, since every result obtained with



this method  is higher than the corresponding result obtained with the scanning



variation and  ion  chromatographic  method.   This  bias  is most  evident for



sample 12 (tar sands wastewater), but is less pronounced for the other samples.



In spite of  the obvious  bias with  the single wavelength variation,  the results



obtained with  this  method agree on the  average  with the ion chromatographic



results as  well as  do the  results  from the sample addition method.   This



reflects the better precision of the absorption technique.



     In completing the analyses using the single wavelength variation, attempts



were made to  correct for background absorption by first neutralizing or acid-



ifying the sample and measuring  the  resulting absorption.   The  sample was then



made alkaline  and  the resulting absorption  measured.   Using this procedure,



corrections  for background  absorption were  negligible.   Apparently,  the



background absorption resulting in the  high bias  for the  single wavelength



variation results  from compounds which are  volatile in alkaline but  not in



neutral or  acidic   solution.   Thus,  while the  identity of  the  interfering



material in  this technique has not been  established,  it must be an  organic



base.   Organic  amines are possibilities although their  presence  has  not been
                                     5-27

-------
 reported  in oil shale  retort  wastewaters  in significant quantities.  Exami-
 nation  of spectra  obtained with selected  samples  confirms the presence of
 broadband  absorbing species.   Thus, the background spectrum can be  calculated
 by measuring the peak height above  the valley and calculating the background by
 comparison  to  the  spectrum of pure NH3.   The results  of such a calculation are
 shown in Figure 5-6.  While the background  is clearly a significant  part of the
 total absorption, not enough detail is present to suggest a particular compound
 or class of compounds.
     Performing the methods described in this chapter  confirms  that each  has
 definite advantages and disadvantages.  The sample addition method requires the
 minimum  investment  in  equipment, the  major items being an  electrometer,  an
 ammonia electrode,  and  a set of microliter pipettes.   It is also highly labor
 intensive and  automation  of this  procedure  would require  a  substantial effort.
 The  ion  chromatographic method can be performed with  commercially available
 equipment, the  principal  items being a suppressed  ion  chromatograph and peak
 integrator or strip chart recorder.   Labor requirements are less than the other
methods and consist primarily  of  periodically checking  on the "proper operation
of the instrument and reducing the data.   The major  difficulty with the ion
chromatograph has been degradation of the columns when exposed to Ca and  Mg and
the drifting response which occurs over time or when the suppressor columns are
exchanged for  regeneration.  The  gas  absorption  method  with  background correc-
tion appears promising  as  a continuous,  on-line monitor because  of the  sim-
plicity of  the measurement  and  the minimum  sample handling requirements.
Optical  absorption  instruments are  often used for process monitors because of
their inherent  simplicity and ruggedness,  yet  no  suitable gas absorption
instrument is  presently available.   If  such an  instrument  is developed,  it
should include a method for correcting broadband  background  absorption.   This
                                     5-28

-------
   0.?
   0.6
   0.5
   0.4
o
CQ
cc
o
to
CO
<£
   0.3
   0.2
   0.1 -
               190
200
                                                        Measured
                                                        Spectrum
	 1 	 L II 1 I 1 I
Calculated
Background
210
                             WAVELENGTH  (nm)

                              FIGURE  5-6

          Gas absorption spectrum over  a retort wastewater
                                  5-29

-------
 could  complicate the device somewhat.  Another advantage of the gas absorption
 method  is  that it responds only  to  ammoniacal  N in the form of aqueous NH3.
 This device  could thus be used to distinguish between aqueous NH3 and NH| and
 also to measure  the  volatility of ammoniacal N as a function of temperature and
 pH, a  measurement of interest to those involved in removing ammoniacal N from
 wastewaters.
 PROTOCOL FOR TOTAL AMMONIACAL N BY ION CHROMATOGRAPHY
 Principle
     NH| is separated from the concomitant cations on a cation exchange resin
 using weak acid eluent.  The NH| is detected by electrical conductivity after
 the conductivity of the eluent is suppressed by passage through an anion
 exchange resin in the OH~ form.
 Comments
     This method also measures Na and l< simultaneously with NH|.   However,  K
 co-elutes with methyl amine and therefore cannot be quantitated when both are
present.
     Samples with major amounts  of alkaline earth metals cause the separator
column  to degrade.  Such samples (e.g., leachates) must therefore be approached
cautiously.
     The experimental work supporting this method was  performed on a suppressed
 ion chromatograph.  No comment is made or implied regarding the efficacy of
non-suppressed ion chromatographs.
Reagents and Supplies
     1.   Ammonia-free water.   Waters  stored in the laboratory are frequently
         contaminated due to the ubiquitous presence of NH3.   It  is therefore
         important to check the  purity of the water used to make  up reagent
         solutions by injecting  an aliquot into the ion chromatograph.   No  NH£
         peak should be visible  on the recording.
                                     5-30

-------
 2.   Ammonia  stock  solution  10,000  mg/1  as  NH3.   Dissolve  31.30  g of
     analytical  reagent  grade  NH4C1  in water  and  bring  to  1.00 liter volume
     with  ammonia free water.
 3.   Stock Na solution,  10,000 mg/1  as Na.  Dissolve  25.42 g  of  analytical
     reagent  grade  NaCl  and  bring to 1.00 liter volume  with ammonia  free
     water.
 4.   Stock K  solution, 10,000  mg/1  as K.  Dissolve 19.07 g of analytical
     reagent  grade  KC1 and bring to  1.00 liter total  volume.
 5.   Mixed working  standards.   Prepare mixed  standards  over the  range of
     1-330 mg/1.  Because the  calibration relationship  is  often  curved,
     especially  near the end of the  working curve, the  standard  concentra-
     tions should bracket the  sample concentration.
 6.   Disposable  syringe, 3 or  10 ml  capacity.   Exposure of  the samples and
     standards to the atmosphere can be minimized by  outfitting  the  syringe
    with  barbed adaptors to permit  the connection of small tubing.
    Transfer of the sample or  standard into the syringe -can  then be
    effected conveniently with minimum exposure to air.
 7.  Syringe-type filters, 0.45 urn pore diameter.   The samples should be
    filtered before injection  into the chromatograph.  This  is accom-
    plished most easily with a filter holder which fits into the luer-lock
    syringe tip during injection of the sample.
8.  Eluents.   Prepare a stock solution of 1 M HC1 or HN03 using concen-
    trated,  pre-standardized reagent available from most supply houses.
    a.    7.5 mM eluent is used for Na+ and NHJ but does not adequately
         separate K+.   Add 30 ml  of the stock solution to a 4 liter
         container and bring to volume.
    b.    5.0 mM eluent is used to separate Na+,  NH| and K+.  Add 20 ml  of
         stock solution to a 4 liter container and bring to volume.
                                5-31

-------
 Apparatus
      1.   Suppressed ion chromatograph equipped with a 100 |jl  sample loop,
          electrical  conductivity detector,  and a standard cation separator
          column  and pre-column.
      2.   Dual  channel  strip  chart recorder  with separate  ranges  or a digital
          peak  integrator capable of  reporting  peak height.
      3.   Apparatus  or  supplies  for diluting samples up  to 1,000  fold.
 Procedure
      Refer to  the operator's manual  of the  ion chromatograph  for general
 operating procedures.
      The  operating  range  of the  instrument  equipped with  a 100 pi  injection
 loop  is approximately  1-300 mg/1.  However,  this can  be readily  shifted to a
 higher range by decreasing the volume  of the sample loop, should the operator
 wish  to avoid  diluting  sampVes and has  no need for  the lower  concentration'
 measurements.
     While the analysis can be performed with  a single suppressor column, it is
 recommended for routine work to  include two  suppressor columns.  The second
 suppressor column can be regenerated while the first column is in use, so that
 a suppressor column is always available.  Otherwise, all analyses must stop
while the suppressor column is regenerated.   An alternative to the use of two
 suppressor columns may be the use of a single cation fiber suppressor which
 needs no regeneration.   This device has recently been made commercially avail-
able but has  not yet been tested in the authors' laboratory.
     To begin the analysis,  inject a series  of standards covering the range
1-300 mg/1.   Plot the resulting peak heights on log-log paper and select a
region on the calibration curve which is linear or nearly so,.   Because the
response of the ion  chromatograph often drifts  during the course  of analyses,
                                     5-32

-------
it is important to recalibrate periodically, including before and after each



series of samples and upon changing suppressor columns.  It is frequently more



convenient to maintain the calibration of only part of the possible dynamic



range, and to dilute samples to fall within that range.



     Samples are injected identically to the standards and are quantitated by



use of the calibration curve prepared as described in the last paragraph.



     The precision of this analysis should be determined, not by repeating a



series of samples in sequence, but by operating a set of samples spaced over a



several  day period.   The latter approach will include contributions due to



instrument drift, while the former approach may result in an overly optimistic



estimate.



PROTOCOL FOR TOTAL AMMONIACAL N BY MODIFIED ELECTRODE METHOD



Principle



     An ammonia ion selective electrode is maintained in a solution of pure



NH4C1  standard to which small amounts of sample are added.   The concentration



in the sample is determined by the change in potential upon addition of the



sample.



Comments



     This method is applicable to samples containing 200 mg/1  or more of



ammoniacal  N.   It requires less equipment than the ion chromatograph method but



is also  more labor intensive and less precise.



Reagents and Supplies



     1.   0.1 M NaOH.   Add 4.0 g NaOH to a 1 liter flask.   Dissolve and bring to



         volume with deionized water.   Prepare 50 ml  per sample.   Note:  water



         contaminated with NH3 will make this analysis more difficult by



         causing increased curvature of the working curve.   See APHA (1976)
                                     5-33

-------
         method 418A for methods to minimize NH3 contamination of reagent



         water.



     2.  NH3 stock solution, 10,000 mg/1 of NH3.  Dissolve 31.30 g of



         analytical reagent grade NH4C1 in d.i. water and bring to 1 liter



         total volume.



     3.  Working NH3 standard, 1,000 mg/1.  Dilute 10.0 ml of the 10,000 mg/1



         stock solution to 100.0 ml total volume.



Apparatus



     1.  Ammonia ion selective electrode, membrane type.



     2.  Electrometer,  suitable for use with ammonia electrode and readable to



         ± 0.1 mV on 100 mV scale.



     3.  Beakers, 100 ml, one per sample.



     4.  Magnetic stirrer.



     5.  Set of micropipets covering the range 10-1,000 jjT-   A set including



         volumes of 10, 25, 50, 100, 250, and 1,000 (jl is suitable.



Procedure



     1.  Preliminary.   Place 50.0 ml of 0.1 M NaOH in a 100 ml beaker, add a



         magnetic stirring bar, and immerse the electrode at a slight angle to



         discourage the formation of bubbles on the surface.   Begin stirring



         and observe the potential.  This potential should be at least 60 mV



         less than the  potential of the 2 mg/1 standard prepared below.   A



         smaller difference suggests contamination of the 0.1 M NaOH with NH3.



     2.  Standardization.  To the beaker prepared in the previous step,  add a



         series of aliquots of NH3  standard stock solution to prepare a series



         of standards.   Record the  cell potential after each addition, allowing
                                     5-34

-------
     a few minutes for the electrode to stabilize.   A suitable series of
     standards follows:
Aliquot
Volume
(Ml)
100
250
50
100
250
1,000
3,000
Concentration of
Solution Added
(ma/1 )
1,000
1,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
Total
Vol ume
(ml)
50.10
50.35
50.40
50.50
50.75
51.75
53.75
Final
Concentration in
Beaker (mg/1)
2.00
6.95
16.9
36.6
85.7
277
825
      Plot  the log of the concentration vs. the cell potential on semi-log
      paper.   Repeat  this calibration procedure to  assure that the slope
      and  shape of the  curve  is  reproducible.   Remove  and rinse  the
      electrode.
3.    Analysis.  Add  50.0 ml  of 0.1 M NaOH  to  a 100 ml beaker as above.
      Immerse  the electrode and begin stirring.  Add 0.250 ml of 1,000 mg/1
      standard,  resulting in  a concentration of 4.98 mg/1,  and record the
      cell  potential,  E  , after allowing a  few minutes for  equilibration.
      Begin adding the sample, starting with 10 ul aliquots  and progressing
      to  larger volumes  until a  total  change  in cell  potential  of
      approximately 20 mV occurs.   Record the cell  potential,  EI  and total
      volume'added to  this point.   Proceed  to add  larger, volumes,  up to
      5.0 ml,  until  a total  change of approximately 40 mV  is  observed.
      Record the cell  potential,  E2,  and the total  volume added  to this
     point.
4.   Calculation.   The  sample concentration is calculated  based  on the
     potential difference EI~EO and  E2-E0 and not on  the absolute  cell
     potential.  Consider  first  EI.   Referring to  the calibration  plot
                                5-35

-------
           prepared  in Step 2,  set  EQ  to  the  potential corresponding  to

           4.98 mg/1.  Determine  the concentration  resulting in  a  potential

           increase  of Et-Eo  and  call  this  C.   The sample  concentration

           calculated at this point is then given by:


          r  - C (Vi  + 50) - 250
          cs       "—71-



           Where volumes  are  in ml  and concentrations in mg/1.  Repeat this

           calculation for the  second data point (E2, V2) to  obtain a second

           estimate of C  .   Average these two results.

 REFERENCES

 APHA,  1976.   Standard Methods  for the  Examination of Water  and  Wastewaters,
     14th  ed.   American  Public  Health Assoc.,  Washington  D.C.

 Cressor,  M.S.  1976.   Determination of  Nitrogen  in  Solution  by Gas-Phase
     Molecular  Absorption  Spectrometry.   Anal. Chimica. Acta.,  85:253.

 Cressor,  M.S.  1977.  Factors  governing the sensitivity of  Ammonia-Nitrogen
     Determination by Gas-Phase Molecular Absorption Spectrometry.  Laboratory
     Practice.  Jan., .1977:19,

 EPA.   1979.   Methods  for Chemical  Analysis  of  Water and Wastes.   EPA-600/
     4-79-020.   United States  Environmental Protection  Agency,  Cincinnati,
     Ohio.

 Gunther, F.A.,  J.H.  Barkley,  M.S. Kolbezen,  R.K.  Blenn,  E.A. Staggs.   1956.
     Quantitative  Microdetermination of Gaseous  Ammonia  by  its  Absorption at
     204.3 nm.  Anal. Chem., 28:1985.

 Haas, F.C.   1979.  Analysis of Tosco II  Oil  Shale Retort Water, Analysis  of
     Waters  Associated with Alternative  Fuel  Production.   L.P.  Jackson  and
     C.C. Wright,  eds.   American  Society for Testing and Materials  publ.
     Philadelphia, PA.

Mulik,  J.D.,  E. Sawicki,  ed.   1979.    Ion  Chromatographic  Analysis  of
     Environmental Pollutants.   Vol. 2.   Ann Arbor Science, Ann Arbor.

Muroski, C.C.,  A.  Syty.   1980.  Determination of the Ammonium Ion by Evolution
     of Ammonia and  Ultraviolet  Absorption Spectrometry  in  the Gas Phase.
     Anal.  Chem., 52:143.

Orion.   1978.   Instruction  Manual  for the Ammonia Electrode.   Orion Research,
     Cambridge,  Mass.
                                     5-36

-------
Prien,  C.H.  et al.   1977.   Sampling and Analysis Program  at  the Paraho Oil
     Shale Demonstration  Facility.   DRI  Report  5624.

Probstein, R.F.  and H.  Gold.  1978.  Water  in  Synthetic  Fuel  Production.   MIT
     Press.  Cambridge, Mass.

Skougstad, M.W., M.J.  Fishman,  L.C. Friedman,  D.E. Endrmann,  S.S. Duncan,  ed.
     1979.   Techniques  for Determination of  Inorganic  Substances  in Water  and
     Fluvial Sediments.   U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington,  D.C.

Takahashi,  M. et al.   1980.   Improvement  of   the  Sensitivity   in  the
     Determination  of  Trace Ammonium-Nitrogen  by Gas-Phase Ammonia  Molecular
     Absorption Spectrometry.  Can.  J. Spectroscopy 25(1):25.

Tannenbaum E.,  E.M. Coffin,  A.J.  Harrison.   1953.   The  Far  Ultra-Violet
     Absorption Spectra of Simple Alky!  Amines.   J. Chem. Physics, 21:311.

Thompson,  B.A.,  P.  Hortech  and  R.R.  Reeves.   1963.   Ultra-violet Absorption
     Coefficients of C02, 02, H20,  N20, NH3, NO, S02 and CH4.   J. Geophysical
     Research, 68(24):6431.

Wildeman, T.R.  and  S.R.  Hoeffner.   1979.  Paraho Waters:   Characteristics  and
     Analysis  of Major  Constituents,   ASTM  Symposium.   Pittsburgh,  PA.
     June 1979.
                                     5-37

-------
                                    SECTION  6



                           TOTAL  SULFUR' IN RETORT GAS







      In  addition to liquid fuel, oil shale retorting produces a synthetic fuel



 gas,  known  as retort gas, as  a  major energy-containing product.  The compo-



 sition and volume of retort gas  vary widely depending on the  retorting process,



 and  analytical  methods  developed for  such  gas  must be insensitive to matrix



 composition.  For  example, retorting processes which heat the oil shale with a



 heat  exchange media ("indirect processes") produce a  gas  containing approxi-



 mately 80-100%  combustible components (H2,  CO  and  hydrocarbons) with a heat



 content  of  approximately  1,000  Btu/SCF (^9 kcal/1).    The  direct retorting



 processes, which combust a portion of the oil  shale in the retort, yield a gas



 containing approximately 80-90%  inert material (N2, C02)  with  a heat content



 approximately ten times  less (Nevens et a!., 1980).



     A major  air pollution concern associated  with  proposed oil  shale develop-



ment  is  the  emission of S contained  in the retort  gas.  Untreated retort gas



may contain S gases at  percent levels in the form of  COS,  H2S,  CS2,  or various



mercaptans.    However, since present development plans call for the combustion



of retort gas as a source of  steam and electricity,  the various S compounds



would be emitted as S02.



     Numerous S-control  technologies, such as the Stretford process and various



amine scrubbing techniques, are presently being considered for the removal of S



species  from  retort gas prior to combustion,  and such systems may be  field



tested during the coming years.  It is thus  important that a means be available



for measuring total  S  in retort gas  so  that the  control  efficiency  of  such



devices can  be determined.
                                      6-1

-------
      A  measure of total S  is  also needed for quality  control  purposes as a



 check on the  determination of  the  individual  S  species.   As  discussed in



 Chapter 7,  methods  are not available at the present time for the determination



 of  all  possible S species in retort gas.  Even if such methods were available,



 the  difficulty of  calibrating for each  species would  normally be too  time



 consuming to  perform routinely.   A measurement of total  S thus provides some



 assurance that major species have  not been overlooked or measured incorrectly.



     The method  should be sufficiently  rugged for use  in a field laboratory.



 In addition,  automatic and rapid operation is essential.   Reagent requirements



 should  be minimal.   The analytical technique must also be compatible with a



 sampling system  which  avoids  cooling the sample  or otherwise  exposing the



 sample  to liquid  water, since  the S  species  found  in retort gas may be removed



 by exposure to condensed water (Wallace, 1980).



     Of the instruments available for measuring total  S  in related types of



 samples, the  flame  photometric  detector (FPD) is  probably the most common



 (APHA, 1977).   However,  several  characteristics of this device  suggest that it



 is particularly unsuited  for retort gas.   These characteristics include inter-



 ferences due to  hydrocarbons and perhaps H2  and C02, instability of the flame



 upon  exposure  to  combustible  gases,  and a  dynamic range which is too  low



 (~10~10  - 10~7 g/sec) for retort  gas.  The latter  feature  requires  that retort



gases be diluted approximately  1,000  fold prior to  introduction into the flame,



an operation  which  is difficult  to  perform well even  under  laboratory



conditions.   In addition, the  response  of the FPD  is compound-specific, that



 is,   the response per   mass  of  S  depends on the  type of S  compound



 (Wallace, 1980; Lucero  and  Paljug, 1974; Gangwal  et a!.,  1979; Pearson and



Nines, 1977; Doehler et al. , 1977).   The latter  feature would be particularly
                                      6-2

-------
 trouble.some  when  trying to determine Sin retort gas without a prior knowledge
 of  the  forms of S present.
     ASTM  method  D  1072 provides a manual  method for measuring total S  in a
 combustible  gas.   In this method the fuel gas is burned, the combusted S gases
 are  scrubbed in a solution  of  Na2C03,  oxidized to H2S04,  and  titrated  with
 BaCl2.   This method  is obviously time consuming, although  the basic chemistry
 appears  sound.
     A  second  ASTM  method,  D 3031,  provides for the  determination  of trace
 levels  of  S  in natural gas by hydrogenating the sample in a hydrogen stream at
 900°C and  determining  the H2S produced with  the methylene blue method.   This
 method  also  appears  time consuming, and  it is questionable whether the hydro-
 genation step would work as efficiently with retort gas as with natural gas.
     Aside from the  FPD, the literature  in  general  describes two main cate-
 gories  of  instruments  for measuring S in hydrocarbon  matrices:   those which
 reduce  all S compounds to H2S prior to  analysis, and those which oxidize all S
 compounds  to C502  or S03.   Both methods  are discussed  extensively  in the
 literature (Kolthoff and Elving, 1961; Kuck, 1978; Wallace, 1980).  In summary,
 either operation can be performed quantitatively, although problems with coking
 have been  reported  in  reductive systems.   For this  study an oxidative  approach
was  selected  because   of  the   ready  availability  of  continuous  and
 interference-free S02  analyzers.  The  objective was then  to  develop a system
 for producing S02  in constant proportion for each of the various S compounds.
     This goal  was first attempted  by passing various S  compounds through a
 heated  tube  in the  presence of air, an  approach which  is used  in several
 laboratory instruments   (Martin  and  Grant, 1965; Wallace et al. ,  1970; Culmo,
1972).   When this approach failed,  the next approach  was  to  pass  the  S  gases
                                      6-3

-------
 through a flame, an  approach  which achieved stoichiometric conversion of all
 the S compounds  tested.
      The final  system was challenged with a variety of S compounds to test its
 ability to measure  total  S  independently  of molecular form.   Finally,  the
 integrated  sampling and analysis system  was  field tested during operation of
 the 150-ton simulated in situ  retort  located at  the Laramie  Energy Technology
 Center.   The  data presented in  this paper  suggest that the  system developed
 should  be applicable to a wide  variety of synthetic fuel gases  as well as oil
 shale retort  gas.
 EXPERIMENTAL                                            '    .
     Gas  flow rates were measured  with Matheson  Model  7642T  rotameters cali-
 brated  with the  gas in use.  Selected flow measurements were also made with a
 Tylan mass  flow  meter with sensing heads  covering the  range 1-1,500 seem.  The
 calibration of gas  flow equipment  was carried out with either dry test meters
 or  bubble meters,  both of which were calibrated in reference  to NBS standards.
 Liquid  flows  were  controlled with a Fisher  Labortechnik syringe pump  which had
 been calibrated gravimetrically.                                         "
     Gas  standards  of the volatile gases—S02,  H2S, and COS—were prepared by
 dilution  with a  flowing stream of carrier gas—either  H2  or N2.   Gas  standards
 for  the less  volatile  species,  CS2,  dimethyl  disulfide and  thiophene, were
prepared  by metering a  constant flow of liquid into  a  flow  of  diluent.
 Evaporation occurred  in a glass tube  under a heat lamp.   Gas  standards  of
methyl mercaptan were  prepared by metering  a  flow of 0.40%  methyl  mercaptan in
N2 into a flowing diluent stream.
   •  S02  was  detected  with  a  Thermo  Electron  Corp.  Model 40,  pulsed
fluorescence  stack  gas  monitor.  The  range  of  this device is  approximately
5-5,000 ppmv.   All gases were  supplied by Matheson.  Reagents were as  follows:
                                      6-4

-------
Thiophene,  analytical  reagent grade (MaTHnckrodt); 0.4% methyl  mercaptan in
N2,  analyzed  mixture (Matheson); Thiophene liquid  (Eastman); Methyl mercaptan
liquid (Eastman); CS2, analytical reagent (Mallinckrodt).
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS
     A large number of S species can conceivably occur in retort gas and it was
not  feasible  to  test the conversion of every possible gas.   Therefore,  a group
of six compounds representative of different compound classes were selected for
detailed testing.  These included S02s H2S, COS, methyl mercaptan, thiophene,
and carbon disulfide.
     Measurement of total S requires that all forms of S in the retort gas must
be converted  to  a species  which can be readily measured.   Because of the ready
availability  of  reliable and  accurate S02 monitors,  attempts  were made to
develop a  method which  would  convert  all  S compounds to S02 with the same
conversion  efficiency.   This was  first attempted  by  passing the  gases  of
interest through a heated tube in the presence of air.  The heated tube used in
these experiments was  approximately 12" long by 1"  diameter and packed with
Raschig rings.  A  residence  time of approximately  4  seconds  was  required to
effect optimal conversion.   Effluent S02 was  measured by a  pulsed fluorescence
S02 monitor which  had  been calibrated  with  pure S02.   Results were compared to
values expected for 100% conversion.
     Two main problems were  evident with this  approach.  When  S02 was  intro-
duced into  the heated  tube,  100% recovery was  achieved with temperatures  up to
720°C.   Above this  temperature loss  of  S02 occurred,  presumably due  to
formation  of S03.  When  introducing H2S into  the heated  tube, a temperature of
at least 650°C was  required  to effect 100% conversion.  Unfortunately,  in the
temperature range  650-720°C  the conversion  of .carbon  disulfide,  methyl
mercaptan,  and thiophene were incomplete and variable, approximately 84*, 83 and
                                      6-5

-------
93%,  respectively.   Thus,  the problems with this approach were (1) the depen-



dence  of the  conversion  efficiency on temperature  and molecular form, and



(2) the  production  of significant amounts of  S03 which would be expected to



damage eventually the optics of the S02 monitor.



     These results can be explained by consideration of Figure 6-1, which shows



that  the equilibrium for the reaction S02 + %02 = S03  is  highly dependent on



both temperature and oxygen content at temperatures below 1,500°C.  Significant



amounts  of S03 can  be formed in this  range.   Dependence upon oxygen content is



also  an  important  consideration since retort gases  contain variable amounts of



fuel which would consume variable amounts of the added combustion air.



     One  approach  to this  problem  would  be to find a  catalyst  which would



selectively convert  all  species to S02 even when operated well below 1,500°C.



However,  a more  straight forward approach,  and the  one  used in this effort,  is



to  carry out  the conversion at temperatures well above  1,500°C  where 100%



conversion is  most  likely.   In order to  achieve  a  sufficiently  high temper-



ature, a flame was used as a converter in all subsequent experiments.



     Laboratory experiments were  conducted  to determine the  conversion  effi-



ciency of a  methane/air  flame using the  apparatus  illustrated in Figure  6-2.



Artificial standards were  introduced  through the inlet labeled "sample,"  and



the response of  the  S02  monitor was compared  for  the various  species.   The  S02



monitor was calibrated with a known concentration of S02  introduced without



passage through the flame, so that the absolute as well  as the relative conver-



sion  efficiencies  could  be  determined.   The  condenser  shown was  included



because  the combustion gases  from the  flame contained more  water  than could  be



tolerated by the S02 monitor.



     The device shown  in  Figure 6-2 was entirely enclosed to avoid contamina-



tion of the combustion gases by air prior to analysis.   This was  achieved by
                                      6-6

-------
   100 r
         I500°C
tn


-------
UJ


1
Lu,



*o



r >
tr,
Ul
tn
UJ
Q
0
o




X






>"
or
— — -^ <
	 	 USK 	 -n
                                                            S-.
                                                            a>
                                                           -t->

                                                            CD
                                                            >-

                                                            o
                                                            u
                                                           nr

                                                           tu-
                                                                      c

                                                                     1
                                                     10
                                                     LU
                                                     oc
                  X<
                             I
                         UJ
                         a: <
                         a.
                                                           £_
                                                           o
                                                                                                       (U
                                                                                                       p
                     f
                                                           fff


                                                           O

                                                           J3

                                                           Of
                         tt.   o
                         22
                         (O  o
                             o
6-8

-------
lighting  the  flame  in open air, and  then  introducing it gradually  into  the
burner chamber.  Although  a flame  could easily be  maintained in  open  air,  it
proved difficult at first to introduce the flame into the closed system without
extinguishing it.  A  stable enclosed flame was finally  achieved  by  balancing
the flow  rates  of  methane, sample, and air  such  that the  gas velocity at the
burner jet was slightly larger than the flame velocity.  This could be achieved
at the nominal  flow  rates  listed in the figure, although it was often helpful
to adjust the methane and air flow rates slightly  to achieve a  conically-
shaped, blue flame.   When operated properly,  the flame was almost invisible and
best seen  in  subdued  light.  Once the flame  was  enclosed it 'could  still be
extinguished by sudden changes in downstream pressure, resulting from attaching
the receiving flask to the exhaust line.   However,  models  of this device  which
have been assembled subsequently for field monitoring exhibited more stable and
more easily  ignited  flames.   This improvement was  achieved by using small
diameter  (1/8")  tubing for the gas  supply lines, for which  slight  pressure
fluctuations  are  less likely to cause  flow  disruptions, and by  including  a
valve downstream from  the  condenser which could  be  closed gradually once the
flame was  lit and  enclosed.   With  such modifications the flame can normally be
lit externally  to  the  system and  enclosed without  extinguishing  it.  It was
observed that small leaks  in the feedthrough to the combustion chamber resulted
in less  stable  flames  and  more difficulty in enclosing the flame.  It is thus
important that the feedthrough be an air-tight seal.
     The  conversion efficiency for seven different S gases was determined for
concentrations  ranging  from 283-34,000 ppmv.   Both H2  and  N2  were  used as
diluent gases  in preparing the standards to  simulate both lean (direct mode)
and rich  (indirect mode)  retort gases.   Table 6-1  shows that the conversion
efficiency is essentially  100% within the precision of the method.  The single
                                      6-9

-------
                         Table 6-1



CONVERSION OF VARIOUS S COMPOUNDS TO S02 IN FLAME CONVERTER

S Species
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S
H2S •
H2S
CH3SH
CH3SSCH3
CH3SSCH3
Thiophene
Thiophene
COS
COS
COS
CS2
CS2
CS2
S02
Carrier Gas
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
H2
H2
H2
H2
H2
H2
H2
H2
H2
H2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
N2
Concentration
of S Species
(ppmv/v)
34,000
15,800
7,000
2,000
1,184
536
283
26,570
12,435
4,174
1,530
1,180
2,640
9,130
26,600
1,820
18,800
4,000
1,960
980
2,220
1,110
3,200
26,000
16,000
7,250
2,900
1,450
1,430
% Conversion
to S02
102.5
96
98
106
98.4
105.6
23
93
98
101
104
. 108
96
101
97
104
95
98-100
101
102
100
101
97
92
100
96
98
95
99

                          6-20

-------
 low conversion efficiency for H2S  at 283  ppmv  is  due  to  baseline drift in  the



 S02 monitor.   For this run the sample was diluted 70 fold, resulting in an S02



 concentration  of  approximately 4  ppmv, which  is  near the  detection limit of the



 S02 monitor used in this  experiment.  Since  the total  S  content  of retort  gas



 is  typically  within the range tested in this experiment, these data indicate



 that  the methane/air flame is an efficient device for non-selectively convert-



 ing the  various S species in retort  gas to S02.  While this device could also



 be  used  at concentrations lower than those shown in the table, further testing



 should be  performed before applying  this method to gases  containing less than



 500 ppmv of total S.



     Although  data  in  Table  6-1 do not  indicate an effect due to  the  sample



 matrix,  a  minor effect can be expected,  as illustrated by the following calcu-



 lation:  assuming that essentially 100%  of the  S species  are converted to  S02,



 the resulting  S02 concentration depends  on both the  flow rate of  the  sample



 into the  flame and  the total  flow rate of gas to the  S02  monitor.   However, to



 a small extent the total flow rate of combusted  gas to the monitor,  Q , depends
                                                                     C*


 on the components "of the sample gas.  For example, one mole of H2 in the sample



 reacts with \  mole  of  02 to form one mole of H20, which  is  removed by the



condenser.  Thus, introducing 100 ml/min of H2 in the sample causes  the loss of



50 ml/min  in total  flow.   On the other  hand, CO in the sample causes  a net



 increase in Q
             C                ..


                            CO + hQ2 —	>  2 C02



Thus, 4,000 ppmv of  H2S in H2 would give a slightly higher response at  the  S02



monitor than would  4,000  ppmv  of H2S in CO.  Such  differences are minimized



primarily  by maintaining  a total  flow rate approximately 40 times higher than



the sample  flow  rate.   Errors of  this type are  considered in Appendix 6A for  a



 range of retort  gases.  Under worst case conditions (e.g.,  using  a standard of
                                     6-21

-------
H2S in N2  for  monitoring a direct mode  retort gas) an error  of  5% could be


incurred.  Thus, for best results a standard should be selected which resembles



somewhat the gas to be analyzed.  For example, choosing a N2-based standard for



the analysis of direct-mode  retort gases would produce errors  of  approximately



0.5%.   Thus, by using a  reasonable standard,  and by keeping the auxiliary air,


premix air  and  methane flow rates constant between sample  and standard, the


concentration of S in the sample is given by the expression (Appendix 6A):



                               (S02)
S-.T.


                  RG ~    STD     2         RG
Where:


     (S)D~    = total concentration of S in the retort gas on a dry basis
        Kb


     (S)STD   = concentration of S in the standard on a dry basis (ppmv)



     (S02)RG  = concentration of S02 produced by the retort gas during

                combustion (ppmv)



     (S02)STD = concentration of S02 produced by the standard during

                combustion (ppmv)




Since S02  is  measured by the pulsed fluorescent analyzer and (S)STD is known,



(S)D~ is  readily  calculated.   The absolute value  of  (S02)  need not be known,
   Ku


but only  some  value in proportion.  Thus,  the  S02 analyzer need not be cali-



brated against an S02 standard, but rather against any standard containing an S



species.  This  feature  of equation I greatly  simplifies  the calibration proce-



dures.  Although  equation 1 is  generally applicable, the  analyst  should  be



aware of  the  assumptions and limitations inherent  in  its derivation, as de-



tailed in Appendix 6A.


     Because of the encouraging results obtained in the  laboratory, a total S



system was  assembled and tested under  field  conditions  courtesy of an oppor-



tunity provided by the Laramie Energy Technology Center.   This test was carried
                                     6-12

-------
out  in  conjunction with  the September 8-15, 1980 operation  of the 150 ton
retort at  the'  North Site Test Facility of  the  LETC.   The apparatus assembled
for  this  purpose was  similar to the  device shown  in  Figure 6-2.   It was
designed to operate for a short period in  the  mobile  laboratory which was on
site  at  the time,  but was  not  sufficiently rugged for  long  term,  routine
application.  Changes  in  the device included an  improved,  positive seal  feed
through and the  incorporation of the combustion  chamber  into the end of the
condenser.   The  primary purpose  of this test was  to determine the mechanical
and pneumatic integrity of the analyzer, not to provide monitoring data for the
retort.
     However,  to deal with actual retort gases several  more substantive changes
were  required  in peripheral  equipment.   The retort gas being tested contained
suspended matter and was saturated with water and possibly oil at approximately
60°C  and could  not be  introduced directly  into  the  total S analyzer without
certain precautions.  Similar gases from other industrial  sources are cooled to
remove water and oils.  However,  in the case of retort gas such treatment could
result in  the  loss of  sulfur  compounds,  and efforts were therefore made  to
avoid this  treatment.   Instead of cooling the  gas,  all  sampling parts which
were exposed to  retort  gas were heated to approximately 70°G.   Suspended matter
was  removed by  an in-line filter.  Since the response of the total S analyzer
is proportional  to the  sample flow rate, the sample rotameter was replaced with
a mass flow meter to obtain more precise and accurate flow measurements.  Since
response of the  mass flow meter to  retort  gas  would likely be different than
its  response to  the standard gas, provisions were  included to calibrate the
mass  flow meter  for each type of gas.                       .
      The entire  flow scheme, including facilities for  sampling, sample con-
ditioning, combustion,  calibration and analysis is shown  in Figure 6-3.
                                     6-13

-------
CO
 I
                                                          UJ
                                                          o:
                                                              4J
                                                               to
                                                               CU
                                                              -a

                                                              'cu
                                                              O
                                                              CO
                                                              01
                                                               01
                                                               C71
                                                               C
                                                              -a
                                                          o  -a
                                                          I-H   QJ
                                                               OJ
                                                               Q.
                                                               O
                                                               QJ
                                                               s
                                                               13
                                                             •i?
6-14

-------
     In order of occurrence, the gas exited the process gas line through a port
which  was  shared with  LETC,  passed through a  glass  fiber filter cartridge
(Balston Corp.), and moved  to the  sampling trailer through 150 feet of Teflon-
lined hose which was heated to 70°C.  The flow of retort gas through the sample
line was controlled  by  valve V2 at approximately two liter minute"1.  At this
rate,  transit  time in  the  sample  line  was approximately one  minute.   The
pressure downstream from  the  sample pump was maintained at approximately 4 psi
with a  back pressure regulator  to  provide a constant pressure  for  metering  •
valve V4, which regulated the flow of gas to the combustor.
     The dry test  meter in  Figure 6-3, with the drying tube and valve V5, was
included to calibrate the mass flow monitor.  Although the mass flow monitor is
relatively  insensitive  to temperature and  pressure,  its  response  is propor-
tional  to the specific heat of the gas.  In theory, then, the mass flow monitor
could be calibrated  either  volumetrically or by measuring the  specific heat of
the sample gas.
     To operate this device the  air and  fuel flows were first  started (with V2
off), the flame was  lit and introduced  into the chamber and the S02 analyzer
was zeroed.  The  span  gas was introduced next with the flame burning burning,
V4 was adjusted to admit approximately 100 ml/min to the burner, and the span
of the S02  detector  adjusted.   Leaving the air and fuel rates constant, the
span gas was stopped, V2 was opened enough to admit approximately 2 liter min"1
of retort gas,  and V4 was adjusted  again,  if necessary,  to admit approximately
100 ml  of  retort  gas to  the  flame.   The concentration of total S  was then
calculated according to equation 1.
     During this test the total  S analyzer (TSA)  was operated from 16:43 on
9/13/80 until  the  end  of the retorting  operation  at  00:13 on 9/18/80.  This
allowed for observation  of  changes  in S  concentrations  on a real-time basis
                                     6-15

-------
 during  much of  this period  and  also provided  valuable  information on the

 operation  of the  analyzer.

      Operating  parameters  were initially set as follows and were left constant

 except  for minor  changes in sample  flow to the combustor.
     Flow rate in sample line

     Premix air flow

     Auxiliary air flow

     Methane flow

     Pressure at back pressure regulator

     Pressure at burner (gauge P3)

     Mass flow meter reading for standard

     Mass flow meter reading for sample

     Temperature of sample line

     Temperature of mass flow meter,
       sensing head, and other components
       exposed to retort gas

     Span gas, CH3SH in N2

     Burner head
    2 al min-"1

  0.8 al min"1

  3.1 al min"1

   90 ami min"1

    4 psi

    0 (atmospheric)

  083 std ml/min

  125 std ml/min

  165°F

  150°F



 4000 ppm v

quartz w 7 mm ID at tip
All parameters were  identical  for both sample and standard except sample flow

rates through the mass flow meter, which varied as indicated.

     The TSA first operated  with  span  gas  and was  then  switched  to  retort  gas.

Stable operation  was  observed in both cases.  The flame burned well in the

enclosed combustion chamber and produced readings which were stable, reasonable

and well  within the working range (1-5.,000 ppmv)  of the S02 analyzer.  However,

no independent measurements of S species were available for comparison.

     The next step was to have been calibration of the mass flow meter with the

dry test meter.   However,  this operation was  not  performed during  this test
                                     6-16

-------
because of  the  unexpectly high level  of oily materials  in the retort gas  which

could  have  resulted in  fouling and  poor  operation of the dry  test meter.

Instead, calibration factors were calculated based on the concentrations of the

major gas components (Appendix 6B).  In the future a bubble meter could provide

a simpler and more rugged method of calibrating the mass flow meter.

     Once measurement  of  the retort gas began (16:55 on 9/13/80),  the analyzer

ran continuously  until  the end of the burn although the recorder was operated

only intermittently.   It  was apparent that S levels were essentially constant

during this period.  The  response time for the complete sampling and analysis

system, including 150'  of sampling line, could also be estimated  during  this

period.  From the time the retort gas was  first allowed into  the sampling line

until the S02 analyzer achieved full response required 4 minutes.

     During the evening of 9/13 to 9/14 the  most serious malfunction of the

test occurred.   The temperature  controller for  those  parts  of the system

exposed to  retort gas  malfunctioned,  allowing the  temperature  to  increase to

100°C.   This temperature  is well  above the rating for the mass  flow meter, and

readings from this  device were erratic thereafter.   For  this reason concen-

trations reported for periods after 9/13/80 should be considered less reliable.

     Total   S  concentrations were  calculated using  equation  1,  and results

follow:

                                                               S (ppmv,
      Date                         Time                       dry basis)
     9/13/80                    16:55-18:18                   3,700-4,000

     9/14/80                    07:30-07:51                   3,800-3,400


     While  the  monitoring data  obtained during this  test was meager,  the

information gained  on  instrumental  requirements  of a practical  total  S monitor

was  substantial.   Most failures  in the  tested  system were related  to  its
                                     6-17

-------
inability to  tolerate a  realistic  retort gas sample.  A  discussion  of the
shortcomings of the  system  tested during this period and  possible solutions
follow:
     1.    During this test  the  components exposed to retort gas  were traced
          with heating tapes to  keep  them above the  dew point  of the retort
          gas.   In view of  the amount of  condensation which occurred,  it would
          appear to  be necessary to  keep all  exposed components  in a
          temperature controlled chamber  at 110°C  or more, above  the  boiling
          point of condensible  materials.
     2.    To use a mass  flow monitor at  110°C,  a special  high-temperature  model
          is required.  Using a  mass  flow monitor is questionable since  the
          sensing element of this device consists of a  small  diameter tube
          through which a portion of  the  gas  must pass.   It would seem that
          such  a sensing element  is inherently inappropriate  for  retort gas,
          and that retort  gas should be  controlled  by devices which do not need
          small,  easily  plugged  orifices.
     3.    A  better approach would avoid using  untreated retort gas either by
          developing  a method of  treating the  gas  which can be  shown not to
          cause changes in  composition,  or by diluting the gas  with  a pure
          carrier to  lower  its  dew point to   below  room temperature.  One
          practical  approach to the latter would be  volumetric diTutors which
          are now commercially available  but  have  not been tested under this
          program.   Such devices operate  by adding known,  fixed volumes of a
          sample  gas  to  a  continuously flowing  diluent gas  stream.  Metering  of
          sample  gas  by fine control valves,  rotameters, or mass  flow meters,
          all of  which are easily fouled by retort  gas, would not  be required.
                                     6-18

-------
      4.   The  dry test meter shown in the figure for calibrating the mass flow
          meter  is too  easily  contaminated and  too  difficult to clean.  A
          simpler device,  such as a bubble meter, would be more appropriate.
      5.   The  lines for  the sample and span gas should be better  separated than
          in Figure 6-3.   This design wastes span gas through the back pressure
          regulator and  also  contaminates the span gas  line with retort gas.
          The  mechanical  back pressure regulator did not work entirely satis-
          factorily,  generating back  pressure changes when the flow  rate
          changed.  A column of water would  appear to be more  reliable  and
          practical as a back pressure regulator.
      6.   Condenser #2  in Figure 6-3  should  be  replaced  with a permeable
          membrane dryer to avoid the need for a recirculating cooling bath.
      7.   In spite of the in-line filter and  the  elevated  temperature  of the
          sampling line,  condensed material was found in the sampling line and
          filter  holder.   Future  designs  should thus  include a better means  of
          protection,  such as more efficient filters or traps.
In summary, this  preliminary  test of the total S  analyzer  indicated several
mechanical and instrumental problems.   In retrospect, these problems appeared
amenable to straight  forward  solution.   More importantly,  the basic operating
principles of the system appear sound.
     At this point in time it was considered that the principles of a total  S
measurement had been  established, and  further  work was not  required  under this
EPA contract.   However,  further  funding  was made available  from  the Laramie
Energy Technology Center  (DOE)  to  provide total  S measurements  in support of
their field testing program (Contract  No. DE-AS20-81LC0771).  This provided  an
opportunity to assemble  and operate  a total S analyzer including some of the
suggested modifications.
                                     6-19

-------
     The  system designed  for  this  purpose was  similar to  the original
laboratory  model  with modifications  to improve reliability  and portability
(Figure 6-4).   Prior  to  introduction  into the instrument, the  retort gas was
cooled, dried,  and  filtered in order  to improve  ease of handling.   The flow of
retort gas  and  standard  was monitored with a rotameter rather than  a mass flow
meter, an approach  which proved to  be considerably more reliable than the mass
flow meter  used in  the previous experiment.  Because  the calibration of the
rotameter was expected to be different for  the  standard and  sample gases,  an
in-line bubble  meter was  included  for calibration.  The calibration  of  the
rotameter for dried,  cooled retort  gas from the direct mode  processes which
have been monitored has  not differed measurably from  the calibration of the
standard.   However,  such  would not  necessarily be  the  case for different  types
of sample gas.   Unlike the laboratory model, this model used a DuPont Model 411
monitor, a  uv absorption instrument to detect the S02 produced by  the flame.
This instrument  has an unexpected advantage in as  much as the cell  operates at
slightly elevated temperatures (approx. 40°C) so that the condenser need not be
as  efficient at removing  water vapor as the laboratory  model.   Unlike the
laboratory model, this model included a cartridge of granular PbC03 which could
be switched  into  the sample line periodically.   The purpose  of this cartridge
was to selectively  remove H2S to measure  "non-H2S"  sulfur species  in retort
gas.  When  challenged with several  1,000 ppmv of  H2S,  this cartridge removed
all measurable  amounts.   However,  its effect on other S  species has not yet
been established  comprehensively.   The pressure switch shown  is included to
turn off the methane flow in the event of a failure in the air or power supply.
     The main problem with the total S analyzer,  as shown in  Figure 6-4, is the
need for almost constant operator attention.  Because  the S02 monitor is  being
operated near its detection limit (approx. 5 ppmv), the operator is required to
                                     6-20

-------
                          Hi!
                            
-------
 check  the zero and span  approximately  once per  hour,  in  addition to  switching
 betv/een the various samples which are being monitored.
     In the device shown, the  inlet  flow  rate of sample and  standard  depends  on
 the  pressure  in the sample and standard  lines.   For best results the operator
 must therefore monitor and adjust the  flow rate through  the sample rotameter.
 Pressure  fluctuations  are  naturally occurring  in  the process line  and are
 transmitted to the  sample line which in turn affects the flow to the analyzer.
 This effect  has been minimized but  not eliminated  by  using  in-line regulating
 devices such as mechanical pressure  regulators and  water  columns.  Although the
 rotameter  is  more reliable than the mass flow meter,  it  still must be removed
 and cleaned  every few days.  These  problems, while causing an inconvenience,
 are easily corrected:   the reliability of the gas  metering could be improved
 through the  use of  a volumetric dilution system as discussed previously.  The
 frequent  switching  between standards and various samples could be performed
 easily by  an  automated sequence of  solenoid valves.   The drifting of the  S02
 monitor, which is associated  with  operation  near the detection limit, could be
 eliminated by  using a more sensitive monitor.
     To check  the operation of the  total  S analyzer,  total S measurements  have
 been made  simultaneously with the measurement of H2S, COS, CS2, and methyl
 mercaptan by  gas  chromatography at  the  North Site Test Facility of  the  Laramie
 Energy Technology Center.   The sum of these individual gases measurements was
 normally slightly lower than the total S measurement.  However, total S results
were occasionally up  to  10% lower than the  summation, indicating a  need for
 improving  the  precision  of one or  both of these techniques.   Nevertheless,
 total  S  measurements  were  clearly  achievable with  the method  discussed and
 implementation  of the improvements  suggested  should  make this method more
 reliable.
                                     6-22

-------
                                  APPENDIX 6A
               DERIVATION OF THE CALIBRATION FORM FOR S ANALYZER


     Since the combusted  gas  is dried prior to  the S02  analyzer,  all  results
from the monitor  are on a dry basis.   In the following discussion,  all  symbols
for gas concentration will be on a dry basis unless otherwise noted.
     The S02 concentration  at the analyzer (S02) is given by the ratio of the
flow rate of S  compounds into the flame divided by the flow rate of the dry
combusted gas.   Consider first the volume of dry gas produced in the absence of
any sample.   Because of the combustion of methane,
(1)            CH4 + 202 = C02 + 2 H20
the volumetric flow rate of the combusted gas,  Q , is given by
                                                C
               QC« QA - %2 + Qco  =    -
                          2      2
               QC =
where Qr   = volumetric total flow rate of the combusted gas, dry basis
       w                                                   -           •
      Qfl   = volumetric total flow rate of air into the combustion chamber
       ft
      QM   = volumetric total flow rate of methane
      Qn   = volumetric total flow rate of 02
       U2
      Qrn  = volumetric total flow rate of C02
       OUg
For the  flow  rates  described in the main  text,  Qc is  therefore approximately
3,900 ml/min.   When  standard gas  is  introduced in the  form of 4,000  ppmv  CH3SH
in N2 at. flow rate QSTD, total flow rate is increased by essentially the same
amount:

<3>            QC = QA - QM + QSTD
where STD denotes standard.
                                     6-23

-------
The concentration of S02 in the combusted gas  (in ppmv)  is then

                            WS)STD
(4)            (S02)
                    STD
where (S)STD is the S concentration in the standard.
     When  the  sample is introduced in  place of the standard,  the  degree to
which Qp  is  altered depends somewhat on the composition of the sample.  Water
vapor  will pass  through  the  flame  and be  collected in the  condenser.
Hydrocarbons and H2 will remove a fraction of the 02 supplied by the combustion
air.  N2 and C02 will pass through the flame unaffected.  Table 6A-1 summarizes
the reactions  which  can be expected for typical  retort gases,  along with the
consumption and production of combusted gas.
     For  the  MIS retort  gas  shown, the flow rate of dry combusted  gas  is
therefore:
(5)            Qc= QA - QM + (0.965 - 0.130) QRG
where the subscript RG denotes retort gas.
The concentration of S02 in the combusted sample stream is thus:
                              QRG(S)RG
(6)            (S°2>RG = QA + 0.835 QRG - QM

Combining equations 4  and  6 thus gives the  concentration  of S in the retort
gas.
                   •           (S°2)RG  Q       + °-835
By adjusting the  flow rates QRG and QSTD to approximately the same value, the
last term  in equation 7 becomes  unity  within experimental error, as  illus-
trated  by  considering  typical   values for  the  various  flow  rates:
Q. = 4,000 ml/min; QRG = QSTQ = 100 ml/min; QM .= 100 ml/min.   For these  rates,
the last term in equation 7 is 0.9959.
                                     6-24

-------
                                Table 6A-1



            PRODUCTION OR CONSUMPTION OF GASES DURING COMBUSTION

Component
%,v/v
Reaction
02*
Consumed
(%,v/v)
Dry Gas*
Produced
(%,v/v)


N2
C02
CO
H2
CH4
C2Hg
C3H6
C4H10
02
H2S
NH3
TOTAL


H2
CH4
CO
H2S
C02
C2H4
C2He
C3H6
CsH8
C4H10
CsHi2
^6^14
C7H16
Cs^is
TOTAL
57.7
32.0
1.0
5.5 '
1.5
0.4
0.3
0.4
0.1
0.3
0.8
100.0


22.5
15.2
3.8
4.3
21.4
5.4
10.4
3.7
4.0
4.2
2.5
1.5
0.8
0.3
100.0
—
—
CO + 1/2 02 = C02
H2 + 1/2 02 = H20
CH4 + 2 02 = C02 + 2 H20
C2H6 + 7/2 02 = 2 C02 + 3 H20
C3H6 + 9/2 02 = 3 C02 + 3 H20
C4H10 + 13/2 02 = 4 C02 + 5 H20
—
H2S + 3/2 02 - S02 + H20
NH3 + 02 = 1/2 N2 + 3/2 H20

DCTODT r*AC — _.._......___

H2 + 1/2 02 = H20
CH4 + 2 02 = C02 + 2 H20
CO + 1/2 02 = C02
H2S + 3/2 02 = S02 + H20
--
C2H4 + 3 02 = 2 C02 + 2 H20
C2H6 + 7/2 02 = 2 C02 + 3 H20
C3H6 + 9/2 02 = 3 C02 + 3 H20
C3H8 + 5 02 = 3 C02 + 4 H20
C4H10 + 1/3 02 = 4 C02 + 5 H20
CsH12 + 8 02 = 5 C02 + 6 H20
C6H14 + 9.5 02 = 6 C02 + 7 H20
C7H16 + 11 02 = 7 C02 + 8 H20
C8H18 + 12.5 02 = 8 C02 + 9 H20

0.00
0.00
0.5
2.8
3.0
1.4
1.4
2.6
—
0.5
0.8
13.0

22.5
30.2
1.9
6.5
0
16.2
36.4
18.5
20.0
27.30
20.00
14.3
8.8
3.8
226.4
57.7
32.3
1.0
0.0
1.5
0.8
0.9
1.6
0.1
0.3
0.4
96.50
•
0
15.2
3.8
4.3
21.4
10.8
20.8
11.1
12.0
16.8
12.5
9.0
5.6
2.4
145.7

volume consumed or produced per 100 ml  of dry retort gas
                                   6-25

-------
      Thus,  for the MIS gas,  the  concentration of total S  on  a dry basis is
 given, within  experimental  error, by
                               (S02)RQ  QSTD
 (8)
                          oTn  fen  \
                          STD  (S02)
                                 2STD   RQ
Since  only  relative concentrations of S02 are important, the S02 analyzer need
not be calibrated separately and a single standard of, for example, CH3SH in N2
is adequate.
     Equation 8 remains an accurate simplification of equation 7 as long as the
standard  is  reasonably similar to the sample gas.  For example, for the field
test described in this chapter, CH3SH in N2 proved adequate for the measurement
of MIS  retort  gas.   However, significant error  may  be  introduced by  using  an
entirely  inappropriate standard.
     Suppose,  for  example, that the  standard of CH3SH  in N2  were used for
measurement  of  a high-heat-content gas,  such  as that produced by the  TOSCO
process.  In this casejsee Table 6A-1) the last term in equation 7 becomes:
                      - 0.807 QRG - QH
(9,
C)
                               - "M
assuming that the standard is still contained in N2.  Using the same flow rates
as above,  R = 0.95,  equation 8  could not be used  without  introducing  a 5%
error.  If  the  gas  composition  is known, R  could  be calculated.   However, a
more  reliable approach  would be  to  use a standard  which more  closely
approximates the sample.   For TOSCO  retort  gas,  for example, one  could  use H2S
in methane, in which case R becomes:
              QA -  0.807 QRG - QM
               A-QSTD-V    .
For the flow rates  used above,  R  then  becomes  1.005 and equation 8  can be
used without loss in accuracy.

                                     6-26

-------
     In summary, equation 8 can be used without the loss of accuracy as long as



the standard  is vaguely  similar  to the  sample.   The effect of dissimilar



standards can be calculated  from  equation 9.   For the examples considered, an



error of  up to 5% could  be  introduced by use of  an  entirely inappropriate



standard.    Equation 8  also assumes  that  Q.  > 40 QRG, which  corresponds  to



approximately a two fold  excess of air over what is needed for stoichiometric



combustion of the  sample  and methane.   Equation 8  is  valid only if Qft and QM



remain unchanged between sample and standards.
                                     6-27

-------
                                  APPENDIX  6B
                      CALIBRATION OF THE MASS  FLOW METER

     The response, r, of the mass flow meter is given by:
 (1)            P = kCp Q
     where k = constant depending on the meter design
          C  = specific heat at constant pressure (cal g"1)
           p = density of gas (g/1)
           Q = flow rate under standard conditions (ml/min)
The meter has  been calibrated for N2,  so  that k = (1/C p )N2 where p  is the
density of N2 at standard conditions.  Thus, for N2
                             (P0)
The reading of  the mass flow meter  thus  gives the flow rate of the span gas
(CH3SH in N2) in ml min"1 adjusted to standard conditions.
     The sensitivity  of the mass flow meter  for  retort gas  can be calculated
from a  knowledge of  its composition.  Note  that  the term C p is  the  heat
capacity in cal  deg"1  liter""1.   For a gas mixture  under standard  conditions,
C p  the heat per liter is given by:

               CPPQ = lOoV Z Cp V
     where V  = molar volume at standard conditions = 22.41
           C  = molar heat capacity (cal  deg"1 mole"1)
            V = concentration (vol %)
                                     6-28

-------
     The concentrations  of  the major gas components were provided by personnel



from LETC, and the term C  is calculated as follows:



                   Component     (vol %)
H2
N2
CO
CH4
C02
H20
other
4.2
46.1
1.8
1.1
20.5
25.0
1.3
6.78
6.94
6.94
8.45
8.75
8.68
11.58
0.289
3.198
0.125
0.093
1.794
2.169
—
                                                       7.667
                   (C pQ) = 0.342   cal deg"1 I"1




The response of the mass flow meter to retort gas is thus given by:




                              (P)   .   _ (.342)  (o)
                RG ~ (CppQ)N2 (P())   G   (.310) (oo)RG  RG     '   (pQ).   !




where QAr  is  the  flow rate on a wet basis.   Since the flow rate on a dry basis
       Ku                                             '


is needed,
     In summary,  considering only flows at standard conditions, as denoted by



the "o" superscript,
and
where the  subscript STD and RG  denote the standard and retort  gas,  and all



flows are on a dry  basis.
                                     6-29

-------
                                    SECTION  7
                          SULFUR SPECIES  IN  RETORT GAS

      Several  writers have suggested that atmospheric sulfur emissions could be
 the  environmental  factor  which limits  the  eventual size of  the oil  shale
 industry.  Sulfur control  technology is  thus crucial to the oil  shale  industry,
 and  it is advantageous  to consider various  types of control technologies.
 However,  proper  selection of a  sulfur centrol technology requires a knowledge
 of the S  species which are present in the retort gas.  For  example,  H2S is
 normally  removed by  oxidizing processes, such as  the Stretford  process, which
 are  ineffective  with other types of sulfur compounds.  S02 is most frequently
 removed by  alkaline  agents,  which are  not  necessarily  effective for other
 components.    Reliable methods of analysis for sulfur species  in  retort gas are
 clearly required.
      In order to understand the  role of  sulfur speciation in the development of
 sulfur  control   technology,  the overall  plant  design must be considered.
 Present development  plans call  for combustion  of the retort gas to produce
 heat.  As such,  various  sulfur  species  would be  emitted  as  their combustion
 product,  S02.   Thus, one  option to sulfur control  is  the  use  of flue  gas
 desulfurization  systems,  such as alkaline scrubbers.  However,  it is  usually
 preferable to remove the  sulfur from the lower volume  uncombusted  fuel gas,
where higher control  efficiencies can often be obtained at lower cost.   In this
 context methods  for  sulfur  speciation  are required,  not  for  regulatory
purposes,  but  for  the selection and testing of  retort  gas  desulfurization
 systems.
     The objective of the efforts  described  in this  chapter is thus to develop
 a method  or methods  appropriate for determining major and minor  sulfur species
                                      7-1

-------
in retort  gas.   These methods must necessarily be sufficiently rugged for use
on site  in a field laboratory and must yield results rapidly enough to permit
the operator to optimize plant conditions.
     The characteristics of  the  gas which must  be  analyzed depends  principally
on the retorting process.  Two major categories of retort gases are recognized:
(1) low heat-content gases, which are produced by processes which introduce air
directly into the  retort (direct processes), and (2) high heat content gases,
which are  produced  by retorts which exclude  air from the retort.  The  indirect
process gases consist primarily of H2,  CH4, C02, CO, and C± to C4 hydrocarbons.
The direct process gases  are of similar composition but are diluted with
approximately 60-70% N2 and 20% C02.   Both gases are saturated with water vapor
and  hydrocarbons  and  may  contain  suspended oil  and water  droplets  and
particulate  matter.   NH3  may be present  in amounts which  depend  on the
retorting process.   At the  start of this project it was recognized that H2S was
a major sulfur species, although the contribution of other species such as COS,
S02s  CS2, and CH3SH was uncertain.
     It was  clear  at  the  outset of this project  that whatever method was
developed  for  sulfur  speciation  must  be  tolerant' of high  levels  of the
contaminant gases and  water  vapor.  While it must  be capable  of  monitoring H2S
routinely,  it must  also  be flexible enough to monitor the several other sulfur
species which had not yet been determined.
     The approach used for this  problem was  gas chromatography  with  a flame
photometric  detector   (GC/FPD).   Several   columns  were  evaluated  and are
described  below  in order  that the  analyst can select the most  appropriate
columns as he  gains  more  information regarding the most  important sulfur
species.
                                      7-2

-------
     GC/FPD has  been  applied widely and is much  discussed in the literature.



Here we mention  only  the most relevant citations,  discussing first the FPD and



then the columns.  A more complete survey has been provided by Wallace (1981).



     The characteristics  of the  FPD have been reported  extensively in the



literature  (Stevens  et a!.,  1971;  Lucero  and Palzing,  1974; Bradey  and



Chaney, 1966).  Salient features include



     1.   A dynamic range of 1CT10 to 10~7 g/sec



     2.   A response proportional  to S ,  where n is normally close to 2.0 but



          depends on the molecular form of the S



     3-   Freedom from reagent requirements except for compressed gases



     4.   Fast response compared to most other S detectors



     5.   Instability of  the  flame upon exposure to combustible gases such as



          H2,  CO, and hydrocarbons, or upon sudden changes in gas flow



     6.   Selectivity ratios  for  S compounds  (as compared to hydrocarbons) of



          up to 104



     7.   Suppression of the S signal by C02 or hydrocarbons



     Several of  these  features are distinct advantages  for field  monitoring of



S species.   For  example  compressed gas requirements are  normally minimal  and



could,   in  fact,  be  provided  by  an  air  compressor and  H2 generator  in



environments where compressed  gases  are not permitted  for safety  reasons.   The



fast response  (item  4)  means  that this detector,  unlike other S-selective



detectors  can be  used  with capillary columns.  The  detectability (item  1) is



more than sufficient  for retort gases  which typically  contain  H2S in the range



1,000 to 50,000 ppmv.   The dynamic range translates to approximately 500-20,000



ppmv with  a 1 ul  sample  injection  volume and a  packed  column.   Present



technology permits direct injection of sample volumes between 0.25 to 3,000 ul,



enabling use of the FPD conveniently for S concentrations in the range 0.2  ppmv
                                      7-3

-------
to  8% v/v.  However,  for any  given sample volume  the dynamic  range is



approximately 500:1 and  a wider range would be more convenient when trying to



cover a range of concentrations with a single instrument.



     The dependence of the FPD response on molecular  form means that the GC



must be separately  calibrated for each gas.  Especially in a field laboratory



the preparation and handling of numerous  gas  standards is  often more  difficult



than the analyses proper, and this  feature of  the FPD  means that most analyses



are carried out on  only  a few  S  species.   Varian Associates has attempted to



minimize this  inconvenience by  placing two flames in  series,  the  first to



combust all  forms of  S  to  common  fragments  and the second to  provide  the



fluorescent signal.   This arrangement  was also  designed  to minimize flame



extinction and  hydrocarbon  quenching.   However,  even  with the dual  flame .



detector,   Gangwal et  al.  (1979),  report  that  the  FPD  remains measurably



sensitive to molecular form.



     The instability  of  the flame arises  from  the requirement of operating the



FPD with a fuel rich  flame,  often verging on  extinction.   After extinction the



FPD typically must  be recalibrated, resulting  in  the  loss of valuable data.



During the initial stages of this investigation it was uncertain whether retort



gases contained sufficient combustible gases to extinguish the flame.   This did



not prove  to be  a problem.  However, flame-out did  often occur during valve



switching until  a flow regulator was installed between the column and detector.



     The problem considered  in most detail in this study was the possibility of



the S  signal being  affected by co-eluting  H2,  C02,  or hydrocarbons found in



retort  gas.   This effect  has  been  reported in the literature,  although  not



necessarily in  terms  that  permit direct  application  to  retort  gas.   For



example, Von Lehmden (1978), reported up to 40% suppression of the FPD response



when C02 was present  in  a thousand  fold  excess.   The  effect of C02  in retort
                                      7-4

-------
gas, which may  reach levels of 20% v/v, was uncertain.  Fluoresence quenching



by hydrocarbons has been discussed by Patterson (1978), Sugiyama et al.  (1973),



and Thompson (undated).  They observed that major amounts of hydrocarbons could



entirely suppress  the  signal  from a minor S species,  (e.g.,  S  in natural  gas),



although quantitative  data  for  commercially  available detectors  was  not



available.   The dual flame  detector manufactured by Varian  (Patterson,  1978;



Thompson, undated) apparently minimized the quenching effect, although data was



not available to quantitate its importance in retort gas.



     Because some  overlap of  hydrocarbons and  sulfur  species inevitably  occur,



it v/as necessary  to  measure quantitatively the quenching effect of co-eluting



hydrocarbons.  For example,  would 3% ethane in retort gas significantly distort



the measurement  of 300  ppmv  H2S?   Because  the dual  flame  detector  offers



apparent advantages while the single flame system is more common, both types of



detectors were investigated and compared.



     As with the detector, column material and design are also widely discussed



in the  literature.  By  way of summary,  numerous column packings  have  been



designed,  each  of  which have  been applied to  a relatively  small  group



(~ie,  2-4)  of  S compounds.    However,  in  the  absence of previous data  the



analysis of  retort gas was  complicated by  the  possible existence of over 20



possible compounds and isomers with 4 or less carbon atoms.



     Packings described  in  the literature include silicone rubber (Martin and



Grant, 1965), polyphenylether +H3P04 on  teflon  (Stevens and O'Keefe, 1970),



acetone-washed Porapak QS,  one  of the most  popular  columns  (De Souza  and



Bhatia,  1976),  silicone QFI 6,500  on  Porapak  QS (Pearson and Hines, 1977),



Tenax GC (Walker,  1978),  treated silica gel  (Stetter,  1977),  and Chromosil 107



(Sklarlew et al., 1981).  The limitations of packed columns are typified by the



procedures described by  Pearson and Hines (1977), which they recommend for the
                                      7-5

-------
determination of H2S, COS, S02, and CS2 in hydrocarbon gases.  For example, the
total analysis  requires  4 different columns.  An  alternative  approach with a
wall cooled  open  tubular column (WCOT) was  described  by Farwell  (1979) which
could separate  most  compounds  with boiling points below 200°C.  Disadvantages
of the WCOT  column,  however, included the  loss  of S02 (one of the  species of
interest in  retort  gas), questionable  separation of COS from large  excesses of
H2S, and cryogenic  column  temperatures,  which  results  in somewhat  more
complicated equipment.
     Gas chromatography  has  also  recently been  applied  to  oil  shale process
gas.   For example, Goodfellow and Atwood (1974) analyzed the gas from a Fischer
assay for H2S  using a GC technique.  They achieved 95% elemental  mass  closure,
which suggested that major analytical  errors did not occur.   Skogen (1980) has
employed columns  of  5% QF-1 and polyphenylether  on Porapak  QS  for monitoring a
modified in  situ  retort.   While these reports deal with application of GC/FPD
to retort  gas, they  do  not include in-depth  analyses of interferences and
suppression effects.
     Because of the detector characteristics, it is preferable that  the  GC
column be capable  not only of  separating the  constituent sulfur  species from
each other  but also  from the  hydrocarbons  in retort  gas.   Because of the
numerous possible S  species  (greater than 20  with  less than 4 carbons) which
could conceivably  occur  in retort gas, and  because of the  lack of  previous
knowledge regarding the species present,  several  columns were investigated with
regard to their separation ability.   These  included a acetone-washed  Porapak
QS, Chromosil 310, Chromosil 330,  Carbopack B HT 100 and Carbopack B/l.5% XE 50
+ 1% H3P04, and an OV-210 treated Porapak QS.  An SP-2 100 capillary column was
also  considered  intitially  but was  discontinued  due  to  its cryogenic
requirements and its inability to separate H2S and COS.
                                      7-6

-------
     In summary,  the  ideal  column for analyzing retort gas must possess these
characteristics:
     •  Separation of all possible S species (which could in theory number
        over 20)
     •  Separation of S species from C±, -C4 hydrocarbons
     •  Resistance to water vapor and other components in retort gas
     •  Reproduci bi1i ty
     •  Complete an analysis in 30 minutes or less for the rapid testing of
        control equipment
     A simple protocol was developed using a packed column for H2S, COS, CH3SH,
CH3CH2SH,  and  CS2.   S02  can also  be  measured  depending on the  relative  size of
the neighboring peaks and  operations.   While capillary columns thus appear
promising for future work, they were not persued in depth at this time.   It was
soon obvious that no packed column could satisfy all criteria,  although through
use of a  selection of columns, several  species  can be adequately separated,
albeit in separate runs.
EXPERIMENTAL                '
Reagents
     Several columns, each  six feet  long,  were  packed in  1/8"  OD teflon tubing
(Supelco,  Bellefonte, PA) and  tested.   Column packings tested were Porapak QS
(Waters Associates),  OV-210 (Pierce Chemical Co. , Rockford, 111.) on Porapak
QS; Carbopack  B HT 100  and Carbopack B/l.5% XE 60/1% H3P04, both from Supelco
(Bellefonte, PA);  and Chromosil 310 and Chromosil 330, both  of which  are
treated silica gel packings from Supelco.
     Gases were  purchased either  from  Linde Specialty Gases or  from  Matheson
(Joliet, 111.).  The  flame  photometric  detector was  operated with  "zero" grade
gases from Matheson.  Two hydrocarbon mixtures  containing Cj to  C6 alkanes  and
                                      7-7

-------
 C2  to C6  n-alkenes were  obtained from Scott  specialty gases  (Plumstead-



 ville, PA).   Liquid  mercaptans and  thiophenes  were obtained  from Eastman



 Organic  Chemicals (Rochester, NY).   Reagent  grade  acetone was purchased from



 VWR Scientific  (Denver,  CO).



 Column Packing  Process



      Each  column was prepared  in  a  six feet length except the acetone-washed



 Porapak  QS, which was prepared  in  an  18 inch  length.  A  plug  of silanized glass



 wool  was placed  in one end, which was attached to a vacuum source.  The column



 support  was  poured into the  tubing  and compacted with the aid of a vibrator.



 All  materials were used  as  received  from the  manufacturer with  the exception  of



 Porapak  QS,  which  was  first acetone washed, and the Chromosils,  which were



 purchased  prepacked.



 Notes on the Individual  Column  Materials Follow—



      Porapak  QS.  Acetone-washed  Porapak  QS was  prepared according to the



•procedure  described by  De Souza et al.  (1975).   5.0 g of Porapak QS was placed



 in  a Buchner funnel on  a' piece of filter paper.  The Porapak was then washed



 with  50  ml of  reagent grade  acetone  and allowed to  stand for five minutes.   A



 vacuum was then applied  for 20  minutes  to dry the packing.  The column was then



 packed and then  conditioned  overnight  at  240°C  with a  carrier flow rate  of



 55  ml min"1.



      Chromosil  310 and  Chromosil 330.   These column materials  can be obtained



 only  as  pre-packed columns from Supelco.  They were selected because of their



 ability  to elute COS before H2S, a feature which is  advantageous when trying  to



 determine  COS  in a large excess of H2S, the  situation expected in retort gas.



 It  is also recommended  because of its  ability to  separate  higher molecular



 weight sulfur  species (Supelco Bulletin 722G).   This column was conditioned at



 70°C  under a flow rate of carrier  gas  (He) of 20 ml/min.
                                      7-8

-------
     Porapak  QS/OV 210.  This column  was  prepared by coating acetone-washed



 Porapak  QS,  prepared as described above, with 0V 210, a trifluoropropyl methyl



 silicone.  To  5.0 g of acetone-washed Porapak QS was added 5 ml  of 0.1% v/v 0V



 210  in  reagent grade acetone.  The  support  was coated by swirling the beaker



 until the  acetone evaporated.  If the packing was stirred,  it tended to break



 apart, so this procedure was  avoided.  When the support was  dry, the column was



 packed and then  conditioned at 25°C with a carrier flow rate of 40 ml/min for



 8 hours.



     Carbopack B  HT 100 and  Carbopack B/l.5% XE 50/1.0% H3P04.  These columns



 are  graphitic  solids  supplied by  Supelco  for the  separation  of sulfur



 compounds, especially  H2S,  S02,  COS, and CH3SH.   In  addition,  the acidified



 column  is  optimized for the  separation  of the isomers dimethyl sulfide  and



 ethyl mercaptan.    Since  the  properties  of  these two  columns  were  not



 sufficiently different,  and  since  the acidic  column is more difficult  to



 prepare, the latter was not  investigated in  detail.   The  Carbopack B HT 100



 column was prepared in a manner similar to the other columns.  However, because



 of its fragility  the column was not vibrated  during  the  filling process,  but



was agitated gently by tapping the side with a spatula.



 Equipment



     Two  separate  gas  chromatography systems  were  used  during this



 investigation.   The first consisted of  a Hewlett  Packard  model  5830A gas



chromatograph  equipped  with  a model  18850A  integrating terminal, a thermal



conductivity detector,  and  a  Varian Associates (Sunnyvale, CA) dual  flame FPD



which had been specially adapted to the Hewlett Packard gas chromatograph.   The



 second system  consisted  of  a Baseline Industries (Lyons,  CO) model 1030A  gas



 chromatograph  equipped  with  a Meloy,  single flame FPD (CMS, Austin).  This



 instrument was modified  to  permit the  FPD  signal to be recorded  by an external
                                      7-9

-------
integrator.  This  FPD  is the mechanical design  sold  by most vendors in this
country, although many manufacturers supply their own electronics.  The valving
and  column arrangement  of  the  Baseline  System was  designed to  permit
backflushing two columns to the detector without extinguishing the flame and is
described in the "Protocol" section of this report.  The Hewlett Packard system
was configured similarly except that only one column was installed.
     Retention times were  measured with the Hewlett  Packard  system using the
thermal conductivity detector.   This  permitted the simultaneous determination
of the  system dead  volume which  was  helpful  in presenting  the  data in a
coherent manner.   The quenching  effects  of the single flame detector were
determined  by  monitoring  the Meloy detector with  the  Hewlett Packard  Model
18850A  integrating  terminal; the  response of the  dual flame detector was
determined  using the  Hewlett Packard  gas  chromatograph  and  integrating
terminal.    Retort gas  samples  were analyzed using only the Baseline system in
conjunction with a Hewlett Packard model 3390 peak integrator.
Preparation of Gas Standards
     All quantitative  standards  were  prepared  by blending  continuously  flowing
gas streams. .Most  such  standards were prepared by blending pure gases or gas
mixtures with  mass flow meters  manufactured  by Tylan Corp.  (Carson,  CA).
Hydrocarbon components of  the  gas mixtures were  introduced with Matheson  model
7642T rotameters.  Both  rotameters and mass flow meters were calibrated for
each gas with  dry test meters  and bubble meters, both of which were calibrated
in reference to  NBS  standards.   Qualitative mixtures (e.g. for the determina-
tion of retention  times) were frequently prepared in  static  systems such as
teflon  bags and glass gas bulbs which had  been equipped  with teflon-lined
septa.   The latter was especially convenient for the preparation of qualitive
standards of the sulfur  species  which are normally liquid at room temperature
                                     7-20

-------
(such as thiophene).  In such cases a few microliters of pure liquid was simply
injected into the bulb with gentle heating if necessary.
Procedure for Measuring Signal Quenching
     Two different  approaches were used  for measuring the quenching of  the
fluorescent  signal  by  co-eluting  hydrocarbons.   In  the first  approach
calibration curves  were  obtained  for H2S by  varying  the  amount of H2S while
keeping the concentration  of ethane at a constant  level  of  20% v/v.  In the
second  approach  the  concentration of  H2S  was kept  constant at  a  level
corresponding  roughly to  the  middle of  the FPD range  (~5  ng) while  the
concentration of ethane  was  varied.   Identical experiments were conducted for
methyl  mercaptan  in  the  presence  of  varying  amounts of n-butane.   All
suppression experiments  were conducted  using an acetone-washed  Porapak QS
column, six feet long by 1/8 inch od operated at 70°C.  The flow rate was set
at 30  ml/min  for all  experiments and the  injection  volume was 100 ul.   This
column  was  selected  for  the suppression studies  because of the  naturally
occurring peak overlap of ethane with H2S and methyl mercaptan with butane (see
below).  However,  to further  enhance the  overlap  of  the  sulfur gas  and
hydrocarbon, measurements  were  made during the backflush mode  of the column.
That is, the sulfur gas/hydrocarbon mixture was injected and allowed to proceed
in the  normal  forward direction for one minute,  at which time  the flows  were
reversed so  that the  sulfur species and hydrocarbon  would  co-elute in two
minutes.   Comparison  of  the retention volumes  obtained under  backflush
conditions indicated essentially indentical retention times.   These experiments
thus  indicate  the  approximate signal  suppression  that would  be  expected due to
exactly overlapping peaks which elute in approximately 2 minutes in the forward
direction for the type of columns used in this experiment.
                                     7-21

-------
     The single  flame  detector was operated with a flow rate of 180 ml/min of



air and  140  ml/min of  hydrogen.   These flow rates were selected by varying the



flows  of both gases until  a  plateau was reached  in  the  sensitivity of the



response.  This  detector  temperature was set to  140°C,  although there was no



way of confirming its  actual  temperature.  The  single flame  detector was



operated in two different modes.  In the first mode the hydrogen mixed with the



carrier gas was introduced concentric and interior to the flow of air.  This is



how the  detector  is  operated in most  cases, and  will be referred  to  as the



"normal" mode  in  this  text.   In  the  other mode, referred  to  here as the



"reverse" mode,  the  air was introduced interior and concentric to the flow of



hydrogen.



     The dual  flame  detector  requires two air  flows  and  one hydrogen flow to



maintain the two  flames.   Gas flows were  as follows:   Hydrogen:   140 ml/min;



air 2  (to  the  first flame), 80 ml/min;  and air 1 (to the  fluorescent flame),



170 ml/min.  The temperature of this detector was  set to 155°C.



Procedure for Measuring Retention Times



     The retention times of  each gas were  found by  injecting one ml  of



approximately  1,000  ppmv gas  and monitoring the  response with  a thermal



conductivity  detector.   (Lower concentrations  were  required  for the  less



volatile gases such  as  thiophene.)  Column temperatures were varied to permit



elution of the gas of interest in a reasonable time.   The carrier gas flow rate



was constant at 30 ml/min.



Procedure for Measuring Actual Retort Gas



     Samples of  actual  retort gas were obtained from  the pilot  scale oil  shale



retorts  located  at the  North Site of the  Laramie Energy  Technology Center



(DOE).   These  included  the  low void volume  retort and the 150 ton retort at



this site.   During routine  monitoring the gas was cooled by passage through a
                                     7-22

-------
condenser  kept  in an ice bath  to  remove excessive water.  Selected samples,



however, were  analyzed  from warmer sections of the process without pretreating



or  cooling the  gas  for testing the  tolerance of the column to  the  myriad



materials and water vapor expected in retort gas.



RESULTS AND DISCUSSION



Flame Stability



     One of  the  supposed problems with  the  FPD  is that the flame  is  easily



extinguished by  the elution  of combustible gases,  such  as solvents.   This



occurs because the  flame operates  with  approximately 100% excess  hydrogen over



that required  for stoichiometric combustion and  is thus  easily  extinguished by



additional  fuel.  An  initial  major concern was  the  stability of  the  flame in



the detector upon the  elution of combustible  components  in retort gas.   This



concern proved groundless  as  the flame  once lit, proved  entirely  stable  during



the analysis of  retort  gas once it was  lit.   However, other aspects  of  flame



stability proved of more concern.



     Because the  composition  of retort  gas was  likely to include a number of



heavier components,  including  sulfur species, the  gas  chromatographs were



plumbed to permit the  column to be backflushed  to the detector.    With  this



arrangement it was hoped to estimate the sulfur species not analyzed in forward



mode and to  preserve  the column from degradation  during  repetitive analyses.



However,  it was  initially  observed that the flame would often  be  extinguished



when the backflush  valve was  activated.   This would occur because the flow of



carrier gas to the  detector would be  momentarily disrupted when the valve was



between positions; in addition,  when the switching was complete, the previously



high-pressure end of the column would  be on the exhaust end, thereby leading to



a sudden burst of gas to the detector.  This problem was  elimated  by installing



the flow regulating arrangement shown  in Figure 7-1.   In  this figure the column
                                     7-13

-------
01—
rtLU
&%'
CO_|'
LULU
ce
v

IT




«
'////////////A
'///////////A
CCLU

23

o5
                      => 
                                                               rcr
                                                              .£
                                                               a-
                                                               o
                                                               -P
                                                               ny

                                                               O
                                                               -Q
                                                               ta
 a>
z
                                                  I
                                                 r»

                                                 UJ
                        CO
                        CC
                2
                




                                                               I

                                                               O)
                                                       o
                                                       o

                                                       CD
                                                              -a
                                                               c
                                                               ny
          7-14

-------
exhaust  does  not go directly to  the  detector,  but first passes through a "T"



and  a  resistance element, R.  Excess pressure  at the "T" is relieved by the



back pressure  regulator,  BPR.   In practice the pressure regulator is simply a



column of  water contained in an  acrylic  tube  into which is  submerged a glass



tube.  The  "T"  is connected to the glass tube  and the height of the tube is



adjusted with  the  carrier  gas  flowing until the back pressure at  the  "T"



almost,  but not quite,  causes the gas  to escape against the column  of water.



The  resistance  element consists  of approximately 12  inches  of 1/16  inch  od



stainless steel tubing which is adjusted  in length and inside diameter until  it



causes the  required back pressure.   Valve VI in  the  figure is adjusted to



approximately 2 ml/min and  is included to avoid the accumulation of sulfur



species  in  that portion of the system.    In practice,  when the backflush valve



is actuated, the column of  carrier gas  contained in the  glass  tube first flows



backwards to compensate for the  interrupted flow, and then bubbles to vent the



excess gas  corresponding  to the  previously high  pressure  end  of the column.



When operating  this system  for  a period  of several  days it is necessary  to



monitor  the height  of  the carrier gas  column in the  back pressure regulator,



since the  resistance of the element R apparently changes  slowly over time, and



carrier gas escaping from the BPR would obviously change the calibration of the



system.



     The flow regulating  system  shown in  Figure  7-1  has  been  used during  the



routine  analysis  of retort  gas  samples  over a period of several days.  During



this time the flame was not extinguished during  valve actuation, nor  during the



elution  of the  sample  components.  In this sense the flame  can be said  to be



stable during the routine analyses of retort gas.



     However,  the ease  with which the flame could be lit varied markedly with



the  type of detector and whether the single flame detector  was used in the
                                     7-15

-------
normal or  reverse  mode.   The single flame  FPD,  referred to hereafter as the



SFPD, could  normally  be  lit on  the first attempt when used in  the normal  mode,



although a certain amount  of trial and  error  was  required to arrive at a



reliable procedure.   This procedure  consisted  of  setting the air  and  the



carrier gases  to their usual levels with no  hydrogen flow.  The  hydrogen was



slowly introduced  while  the ignition button was  depressed,  activating a hot



filament in  the vicinity  of the  burner head.    As  the hydrogen  flow was



gradually increased with the ignition on, the flame would eventually ignite, as



evidenced by the appearance of steam in  the  exhaust from the  detector or the



deflection, of  the  strip  chart  recorder.   The ignition was  maintained while



increasing the  hydrogen  flow until a self-sustaining flame could be obtained,



usually in the  range  of 50  to 80% of  full  flow.  The hydrogen flow was then



slowly increased to the  correct  level.   Experience  showed that the SFPD  in the



reverse mode could best be lit in a similar manner,  except that the carrier gas



was initially  turned  off,  and the  hydrogen  flow was brought up more slowly and



cautiously.  After ignition  the  flame is allowed to  stabilize for 5 minutes,



after which  the He carrier gas is  slowly added.  In practice  the SFPD in the



reverse mode was often very difficult to light,  and attempts to do so sometimes



had to be  abandoned.   Numerous lighting  procedures  were attempted, although



none proved  entirely  satisfactory.   The authors  consider  this  feature of the



SFPD a major impediment to its use in the reverse mode.



     In every  case the dual  flame FPD,  referred to  hereafter as the DFPD, was



very easy  to light following the manufacturers  instructions:   both the air and



the carrier gases were set to their final values, and the igniter was activated



as  the  H2  was  introduced.   The  ease of  ignition was  a definite  attractive



feature of  the DFPD.   Although the  DFPD was  designed,  in  part,  to be less
                                     7-26

-------
readily extinguished, it nevertheless required the flow regulation system shown

in Figure 7-1 when used in the backflush-to-detector mode.

     For each detector  the response was less  reproducible  when  the  flame was

first lit,  and  a warm-up period of 24  hours  was required for best  results.

This was allowed in  every case when quantitative  data were required.  After

such a warm-up  period the response to  standards was  reproducible  to 0.5-1.0%

relative under laboratory conditions.

Fluorescence Quenching

     Figures 7-2 and  7-3  show calibration  curves for H2S obtained on the DFPD

as a function of peak area and peak height  respectively.  The  injection  volume

for each curve  is  100 microliters, so  that the  range of injected H2S varies

from approximately 7-70 ng.   Also  shown in these  figures are  the  calibration

relationships obtained  under  identical conditions  but with  the  standard

containing  20%   ethane,, corresponding   to  approximately  2  micrograms per

injection.                                                                   -

     In both figures  no  effect due to  the  added ethane can be observed.  For

the injection volume employed (100 (jl),  it can be concluded  that 7-70 ng of H2S

(60-600 ppmv) can be  determined without interference in the presence of 20 (jg

(20%) of  co-eluting  ethane.   Since the peak  shape  is not  affected  by  the

injection  volume,  the  same  statement  applies  to the  determination of

600-6,000 ppmv of H2S  in  pure ethane with a  10  (jl  sample volume,  or to the
                                       *
determination of 6-60 ppmv  of H2S  in the presence of 2% ethane with a  1 ul

injection volume.

     Based on the presumption that other gases behave similarly to ethane and

H2S, similar statements  can be made for other sulfur species  coeluting with

other hydrocarbons.   Most  retort gases  contain much less than 20% v/v ethane,

and this concentration was chosen as an  extreme example.  In fact,  2% v/v would
                                     7-17

-------
   10
               20% ETHANE
                NO ETHANE
LU
  10"
Ui
Q.
  10
   -I—I  I »  I 11
-I—I—II I til
    10
            ioo                    1000
           H2S CONCENTRATION (ppmv)
                    FIGURE 7-2

H2S calibration curves obtained with  the  Dual  Flame
   Photometric Detector as a function of  peak  area
                                                                          10,000
                                      7-18

-------
   10
   10°
LU
  10*
  10
           O  H2S  WITH 20° ETHANE
           X  H2S  ONLY
  1.0
                                   J	L
                                  t i I
                                                               -i—i—i  i  i i  i 1
    10
            100                     1000
           H2S CONCENTRATION (ppmv)
                   FIGURE  7-3
oS calibration curves obtained  with  the Dual  Flame
Photometric Detector as a  function of peak height
                                                                           lopoo
                                       7-19

-------
be a  more  likely upper limit, indicating  that  the DFPD should be essentially
free of quenching effects during the analysis of retort gas.
     Figures 7-4 and  7-5  show calibration curves for H2S obtained on the SFPD
operated in  the reverse  mode as  a  function of peak area  and peak height
respectively.  The  injection  volume  for each curve was  100  microliters,  as  for
the DFPD.   Also shown  in these figures  are the  calibration  relationships
obtained under  identical  conditions  but with  the  standard containing  20%
ethane, corresponding  to  approximately 20 micrograms of ethane per injection.
Although not clear  in this  figure, other  calibrations  of the  SFPD have  shown
its dynamic  range,  operated  under these  conditions,  to be  approximately
1-100 micrograms per injection, somewhat lower than the DFPD.
     The effect  of  the added  ethane  is clearly  visible  in either  figure,  as is
the observation that the suppression generally increases with decreasing sulfur
content.  Referring to Figure 7-4,  it is apparent that for a peak area count of
10,000  in the presence of ethane the  H2S concentration  would be underestimated
by 75%  under the  chromatographic  conditions employed  for  this experiment.
Measurements obtained  by  peak height  would  be  in  error by similar  amounts.
However, in  the  peak height mode both signal  suppression and enhancement occur
in the  presence  of ethane,  a result which, to the authors'  knowledge, has not
been previously reported in  the literature.
     Twenty percent  ethane exceeds the amount expected in retort gas and such
extreme errors would  not  normally  be expected when  analyzing  actual  samples.
However, the  SFPD  is clearly more prone to  signal supression  by  co-eluting
hydrocarbons than is the DFPD.  Thus, while the DFPD could be used with confi-
dence for essentially any retort  gas  sample, the  SFPD  must be applied  more
cautiously.
                                     7-20

-------
IxJ
•
                                                                                                                              O
                                                                                                                              o
                                                                                                                              o
o
o
o
cf
 o
ei~'

 £-

r(->
 O)


 §
•!->

 O


Oi


 OJ
                                                                                                                                               (O
                                                                                                                                            OJi UJ
                                                                                                                                            •I--OJ
                                                                                                                                            t^ Q..
                                                                                                                                               O
                                                                                                                                            ns
                                                                                                                                               (O
                                                                                                                                            (/>' O
                                                                                                                             §•
                                                                                                                             O
                                                                                                                             O
                                                                                                                                            S- 
-------
UJ
z:
LU
o  o
CM  Z

O  X
                                                                                                .05
                                                                                                J.r~
                                                                                                •cu
                                                                                                to
                                                                                                O)
                                                                                                Q-
                                                                                                £=
                                                                                                O
                                                                                                O
                                                                                                c:
                                                                                                re
                                                                                                s-
                                                                                                o
                                                                                                O
                                                                                                   -S
                                                                                                
-------
     Following the  same reasoning as applied  to  the DFPD, one would  expect
quenching effects similar  to  those shown in Figures 7-4 and 7-5 if the sample
gas contained 2% ethane with a 1 ml sample injection volume, corresponding to a
sulfur range of  1-100  ppmv.   Slightly less quenching would be expected with a
10 micro!iter sample injection  (100-10,000 ppmv) if the  sample  consisted of
100%  ethane.   These  results  are  applicable  only  to  the  chromatographic
conditions applied  in  this experiment,  consisting of two  exactly  overlapping
peaks eluting from  a packed column in approximately 2 minutes.   Since the FPD
is a flow sensitive detector,  similar quenching would be expected under similar
flow  rates  of hydrocarbon  and  S  into  the detector.  For  the experimental
conditions discussed,  the  mass  flow  rates  can  be  estimated from the peak shape
and elution volume.   (Based on response of the thermal  conductivity detector in
this experiment  the full  peak width at half height was 0.2 min at a flow rate
of 30 ml/min.)
     Figure 7-5  suggests  that the effect of hydrocarbons on the S emission is
more  complex  than  a uniform supression of  signal,  and this is supported by
examination of  the  peak  shapes  which  occur in the  presence and  absence of
hydrocarbons.   In  the  absence of  hydrocarbon  the H2S  peak is symmetric  and
normally shaped.   Upon the addition of 3% ethane the peak sometimes  became
slightly higher  and often three times narrower.  Upon the addition of 60-100%
ethane the center of the peak was suppressed  more  than the edge causing the
original  S peak to divide into two separate peaks.
     The second  set of experiments measured signal  suppression by injecting a
constant mass  of  S while  varying the amount of co-eluting hydrocarbon.
Figures 7-6 and  7-7 were  obtained with a  SFPD operated in the normal  and
reverse mode, respectively and  show the effect of coeluting ethane on the H2S
peak area and height.   The indicated points, if taken in the direction of
                                     7-23

-------
                        1H9I3H  MV3d 3AI1V13M
         O
         O
O
CO
                                                         O
                                                         evi
O

O
O
OL

                                                                                             Q)

                                                                                             03.
                                                                                             CJ

                                                                                             ED
                                                                                             E

                                                                                             in 0}
                                                                                               -a
                                                                                             01 o
                                                                                             i= s
                                                                                             -t->

                                                                                             S-'cO
                                                                                             O) C
                                                                                             £T
                                                                                             njd)
                                                                                         IO  -i—O
                                                                                          I-   -t-> O>
                                                                                     Hj  LU   O) i.
                                                                                     O  °^   I OJ
                                                                                     z  r>   o-cx.
                                                                                     o  J5   °°
                                                                                     z      p_-j
                                                                                               O)
                                                                                             CDOJ
                                                                                            •ir-'Q
                                                                                             i/r
                                                                                               o
                                                                                            t/>'i—
                                                                                             CMS-
                                                                                            rc-u
                                                                                               OJ
                                                                                             cu E
                                                                                             O

                                                                                             
-------
o

 r
           O
           O
                                    J.H9I3H  W3d 3AI1V13N
o
CO
                                     §
o
OJ
o
o
to
 CVJ
UJ
CO
ae
ui

LU
oe
                                                                                         o
                                                                                         ci
                                                                                         o
                                                                                         o
                                                                                         o
                                                                                                    O)

                                                                                                    
                                                                                                      > S-
                                     -Q O
                                        4->
                                     •— O
                                     as O)
                                     £= -M
                                     cn a>
                                     •r--Q
                                     to
                                        o
                                     e/> -i—
                                      OJS-
                                     ac +J
                                        O)
                                                                                                      o

                                                                                                   o a.

                                                                                                   O5

                                                                                                   •r-'
                                                                                                   .£=
                                                                                                   O

                                                                                                   CD
                                    CD
                                                                          «\J
                                           >IV3d 3AI1V13M
                                            7-25

-------
increasing concentration of  added ethane,  correspond  to  0,  0.1,  0.3,  1.0,  3.0,
10.0, 30.0, and  100.0% added ethane when a 100 microliter injection volume is
employed.
     The plot  of peak area (Figure 7-6) shows a monotonic decrease with added
ethane,  the  so-called fluourescence  quenching effect.   The remaining  three
curves  are  more complex,  showing both attenuation  and  enhancement  of  the
signal.  It is difficult to  predict from the data in these figures the extent
to which fluourescence  quenching would be  a  problem.  Of the curves shown, the
plot of  peak  area for the SFPD  operated in  the normal  mode resulted in the
largest errors,  while  the  plot of peak height for  the  SFPD operated in the
reverse mode resulted in the smallest errors.  For example, for the former plot
(peak area, normal  mode) an error in  the  signal  of 10% occurs  at 1% added
ethane, while  the  latter plot  (peak  height,  reverse mode)  does not deviate 10%
over the  entire range  of  1-100%  ethane.  These  data were obtained  with  a
100 micro!iter injection  volume, and  corresponding  less quenching would  be
expected as  the injection volume is  decreased.  Thus,  if H2S  were  to be
measured at a concentration of 5,000 ppmv with a 1 microliter injection volume,
the signal quenching  would be  less than 10% even in pure ethane.  Response of
the FPD  varies with the square of the S concentration,  so that a 10% signal
suppression leads to a 5% error in concentration.
     Experiments identical to  those  described in the previous  paragraphs were
performed for  methyl  mercaptan co-eluting  in the presence of n-butane.   These
data are shown in Figures  7-8  and 7-9  for the SFPD in the  normal  and reverse
mode respectively.  These  figures illustrate that signal suppression is more
pronounced than  for the  experiments  with H2S.  For example, for the  plot of
peak area in  the normal  mode the signal  is attenuated 22% upon the addition of
only 0.1% butane.  For the plot of peak height obtained from the normal mode,
                                     7-26

-------
1H9I3H  >!V3d  3AllV13y
                                                                        O)

                                                                       4->

                                                                        S_  O

                                                                        , g

                                                                          O)
                                                                       r— Q.
                                                                       rO O
                                                                       E
                                                                       O> S-
                                                                       •r- O
                                                                       CO 4->
                                                                          O
                                                                       S= 01
                                                                       CO 4-5
                                                                       4-> O)
                                                                       O.O
                                                                       CO
                                                                       O O

                                                                       01 sL
                                                                       £ 4->
                                                                       >. o
                                                                       -C •)->
                                                                       4J O
                                                                       a> ^:
                                                                       E Q-
                                                                       a> ai
                                                                       o
                                                                          a>
                                                                       en,—
                                                                       c a>
                                                                       •r- c:

                                                                       O 
-------
1H9I3H MV3d  3AIJLV13M
                                                                    IV3d 3AI1VT3H
         7-28

-------
the  addition  of 0.1%  butane results  in  an attenuation  of  15%.   When the



detector  is operated  in the reverse mode, the same addition of butane results



in a  signal enhancement of 5% in terms of peak area and of 4% in  terms of peak



height.   When  the  detector is. operated in  the  reverse mode,  the  peak area is



within 10% of  the  correct value until 0.6% butane is added,  but then declines



to 90% of the  original value upon  the addition of 30% butane.  Examining the



plot of peak height for the reverse mode indicates that the signal is within 6%



of the correct value  until 20%  butane is added.  While peak attenuation  is



observed  in all figures,  it is  apparent  that  hydrocarbon  interference  is



minimized by operating the SFPD in reverse mode and by using peak height as the



calibration parameter.



     In relating this  data to the analysis  of  retort gas,  recall  that an  error



of 10% in the  FPD  signal generates a 5% error in concentration.   According to
                           i


these data, then, 95% accuracy could be achieved in the presence of 0.6% butane



by measuring peak area in the reverse mode, or in the presence of 20% butane by



measuring  peak height.   These results apply  to  a  100 microliter  sample



injection, which  corresponds  to  a  concentration  range  of  approximately



10-1,000  ppmv  of S, and should be adjusted accordingly for  different concen-



tration ranges.  Thus,  assuming the range of interest for S compounds in retort



gas is above 10 ppmv,  the data suggest that determinations can be  obtained with



a 95% accuracy  by  using the SFPD  in  the  reverse mode and calibrating against



peak height.



     Identical  experiments were  carried out with the  DFPD,  and .these results



are shown  in Figure 7-10 for H2S in the presence of ethane and in Figure 7-11



for methyl mercaptan in the presence  of  n-butane.   In the case of H2S/ethane



attenuation is  not observed except at the highest concentrations.  The same is



true of the methyl  mercaptan/butane results.  The DFPD all but eliminates the
                                     7-29

-------
                           JLH9I3H XV3d 3AI1V13H
                                            O
                                            1
                                                       cvl

                                                       O
in
 CM



Q."
O.
                    O
                   O
                    -»
                       UJ
                       OC
p

O
O
                                                                                O

                                                                                O
                                                                                        O)
                                                                                        OJ

                                                                                        10
                                                                                        4J S-
                                                                                        O) O
                                                                                  ii     cno
  o

   CD
                                                                                        3 Q

                                                                                        a> o
        o •»->
           O)
        >» E
        ^j C3

        r— O
        ta jz
        Sw f^ u
        Ol
        •r- O)
        w S
           to
        «/> 1—
         CM4-
                                                                                        O) ra
                                                                                        u
                                                                                        E
                                                                                        (1)
                                                                             —'o
                                                                              o
                                  >»V3d  3AI1V13H

-------
                         CO
                         o
                              1H9I3H MV3d
co
O
                                                  O

                                                  1
tn
o
Q.
                             LU
                             CC
                       ^
                           ^>
                                                             g
                                                    O
                                                    O
                                                    O
                                                                                        O
                                                                                        C3
                                                             I

                                                             OJ
                                                             E
                                                             as

                                                             •3


                                                             cn
                                                                                                   =s s-
                                                                                                  i— O
                                                                                                   o> -i-»
                                                                                                   i  o
                                                                                                   O d)
                                                                                                   O -M
                                                                                                     CD
                                                                                           2 ^  -5
                                                                U

                                                                tT
                                                                                           o


                                                                                           LU
                                                                                           m
                                                         LU  (/) O

                                                         =3  CO
                                                         CEJ  (O .^
                                                             4-> Q.
                                                             Q-
                                                             fC O)
                                                             .0 E
                                                             S- (O
                                                             0) r—
                                                             E U-
                                                                                                  £§
                                                                                                  •<-> o
                                                                                                   O)
                                                                                                   
-------
 interference  effect except possibly  at concentrations of added  hydrocarbons
 which  are  greater than would be encountered  in  retort  gas.
     Each  of  these  detectors has  its  limitations.  The DFPD appeared to be more
 sensitive  to  variations  in flow  rate  of the carrier gas and is more prone to
 develop  light leaks which have the effect of degrading the dynamic range to a
 point  of marginal  utility.   This requires  occasional replacement of light
 seals.   However,  the SFPD  is more  prone to quenching, an effect  which  is
 minimized  by  calibrating with peak height and  operating  in the reverse mode.
 However, in the reverse mode the  SFPD  flame  is  difficult (sometimes impossible)
 to ignite.
     The  mechanism(s)  of signal  quenching  has  not  been addressed  in  this
 report.   However,  several types  of mechanisms have been proposed  including
 (1) interference  in the  formation mechanism of the  activated  S species;
 (2) reaction  with  the activated  S species;  (3)  absorption  of the  emitted
 radiation  by  hydrocarbon decomposition  products; and  (4) a  change of  the
 position of the  H-rich  emission  region  in the  flame.   Further information  is
 present in the literature (Gilbert, 1970; Patterson et al.,  1978).
 Uniformity of Response
     In theory one  could quantitate the various  S species by calibrating  the
 FPD separately for  each  species.   In  practice,  it becomes .prohibitive  to be
prepared to calibrate for every S species,  especially in a  field laboratory
with limited  space  and  facilities.   It would  obviously  be  preferable  to
 calibrate  with  only a few species and then infer from their responses  the
 calibration of the remaining gases.
     For this reason the relative responses of four  S species—H2S, S02,  CS2,
 and thiophene, representative  of  different compound  classes,  were determined.
 Standards  of  these  gases were injected  in  one  microliter quantities onto  a
                                     7-32

-------
Chromosil  310  column at 70°C; detection was  by SFPD operated in  the  normal

mode.  In this experiment the current from the detector was recorded on a strip

chart recorder and  entered in digital  form with a model  9874A digitizer into  a

model 9845B desk  top microcomputer  (Hewlett  Packard).  The  linearized peak

area, A1, was then calculated according to the expression

(1)                            A'. = Ji^dt'

     where i = detector current
           t = time
           k = arbitrary constant

To the extent  that  the FPD responds to  the mass flow of S independent of the

molecular form, the  quantity  A1  should be  independent of the  species which are

injected, as well  as elution time and peak shape.

     Table 7-1 lists  the  relative responses obtained for these four compounds

in terms of  linearized peak area per  ng  of S.   Relative  responses of these

compounds, which  represent a  disparate  group,  vary  from  1.1 to  5.6.   This

suggests that  relative responses  of various  S  species  would fall  within a

factor of three of  an average value, although such a conclusion would require

additional testing.    Based  on the data presented in the previous section, the

DFPD or the SFPD operated in the reverse mode would presumably demonstrate less

variation  in  relative responses.   However,  time and  budget  did  not  permit

further investigation  of  this possiblity,  and until  such testing  is performed,

it is evident that the FPD of either variety must be calibrated with the gas of

interest to obtain quantitative results.

Column Characterization

     Retention data for the columns investigated are grouped as follows:  the S

gases of most  interest—H2S,  COS, CS2 methyl mercaptan,  and  S02—are  grouped

together and  are  referred to as  the primary  S gases.   The S gases of less

interest—dimethyl sulfide, dimethyl disulfide, ethyl mercaptan•, thiophene,
                                     7-33

-------
                      Table 7-1

  RELATIVE RESPONSE OF THE FPD TO FOUR SULFUR GASES
WITH THE SINGLE-FLAME FPD OPERATED IN THE NORMAL MODE

Gas
H2S
S02
CS2
Thiophene

Concentration
(ppmv)
4,927
15,000
5,010
4,544

A1 = Ji^dt
(arbitrary units)
12.5
15.69
53.6
15.89

A '/mass of S
(ng-1)
2.68
1.10
5.67
2.83

                        7-34

-------
 2-methyl  thiophene, 3-methyl thiophene, and t-butyl mercaptan—are also grouped


 together  and  will  be  referred to  as the  secondary  S  compounds.   The


 hydrocarbons  examined  include  methane, ethane, ethene, propane,  propene,  and


 n-butane;  data for these species are  also  grouped together.   Retention time


 data are  also  included occasionally for water and ammonia.  For each column the


 adjusted  retention  time,  tr, which is defined  as  the absolute retention time


 less  the dead  volume  elution  time,  is  plotted  as  a  function  of column


 temperature.  Such plots are normally  straight  lines over the temperature range


 of interest for this study, which simplifies data collection and presentation.


     To some  extent the division of the  S  species into primary and  secondary


 groups  reflects  the philosophy behind this effort, which  was  to develop a


 simple  analytical  protocol  for the  most  important S  species in  retort  gas.   At


 the beginning of this project,   however, it was  not clear which compounds should


 be considered the most important, although it has long been considered that H2S


 is the  predominant S species  in  retort  gas.    Preliminary  reports have  also
                       /

 noticed the presence of CS^, methyl mercaptan,  and COS  in retort  gas and  other


 synthetic fuel gases (Sklarew et al.,  1981), and these compounds were therefore


 included  in the  primary group.   Although S02 has  not been  reported  in  retort


gas to  the authors' knowledge,  it  was nevertheless of interest  due  to its


common  occurrence  in  combustion  gases.   The  presence of S02 has  also been


proposed  as a  precurser to various  S  species of  intermediate oxidation  state


which are  found  in  the condensate from retort gas (Stuber et al., 1978).   The


objective of this work thus became  development of a procedure for determining


the primary  S  species in  retort gas in  a manner  which was free  from


 interferences  by  other S  species,  that  is, free from  interferences by the


secondary  S  species and also  free  from  significant quenching by  co-eluting


hydrocarbons.   In  final  analysis,  this division  into primary and secondary
                                     7-35

-------
groups is  somewhat  arbitrary,  since some  secondary S  species  may eventually be
found at higher concentrations than primary S species.
     Retention times  for  the  Porapak QS column  are shown  in Figures  7-12,  7-13
and  7-14  for the primary S species,  secondary  S  species,  and  hydrocarbons,
respectively.  Although an  adequate separation  of the primary S species  can be
obtained,   for example at  90°C,  all  secondary species  elute  so closely as to be
essentially  inseparable.  The  secondary  species elute on top of the primary
species COS,  S02,  and methyl mercaptan,  making this  column useless  for the
analysis of  retort gas except  for  H2S and possibly  CS2.   Indeed,  the same
comment would  apply  for  any  type  of  sample  gas  except those  known  not to
contain any  of  the  secondary  S  species.   Ethane and ethene  both  elute
essentially  simultaneously with H2S,  precluding the use of  this column for the
determination of H2S  in gas streams containing high levels of either of these
species.    More than  one batch  of  acetone-washed Porapak QS  was  prepared  during
this experiment,  and  it was observed that the retention times  varied widely for
this column.   In addition,  although S02 tailing was not a problem with freshly
prepared columns,  it  tailed for several minutes on columns  which had been  used
for  longer periods.   On the other  hand,  one  major advantage  of this column,
which consists of  a styrene-divinyl benzene  polymer, is its  resistance to water
vapor, which is  often one of the major components of retort gas.  Thus,  while
this column  packing  appears  to be  of  little  use  for  other  species,  it may be
worthwhile for H2S, as long as the  levels  of ethane and ethene are sufficiently
low.  This column  was also  evaluated during a run of  several  days using  actual
retort gas, as discussed below.
     Figures  7-15  to  7-17 illustrate the retention times that  were obtained
with 1% 0V 210  on  Porapak QS.  Among  the primary group,  H2S, CS2,  and methyl
mercaptan  are well  separated,  although COS and S02 are not.   The former
                                     7-36

-------
lOO.Or
                                      ACETONE-WASHED
                                      PORAPAK QS
    30
40
50
 60       70       80
TEMPERATURE (°C)
    FIGURE 7-12
90
100
Retention times for the primary sulfur compounds with acetone-washed Porapak QS
                                     7-3 7

-------
 100.0 r
  10.0-
1=


UJ
•z.
o
LiJ
O
Ul
co
:=>

o
                                  ACETONE-WASHED

                                  PORAPAK  QS
                                                    2-Me + thiophene
   0.1
     30
40
50
80
90
                  60       70

                 TEMPERATURE (°C)



                    FIGURE 7-13

Retention times for the secondary  sulfur compounds

          with acetone-washed  Porapak  QS
                                       7-38

-------
lO.O
 1.0
o


LU

UJ
OC

a


to
13

O
 0.1
 .0
                                      ACETONE-WASHED
                                      PORAPAK QS
                                                   Ethene
                                    .Methane
            40"       50        60       70       80        90
                              TEMPERATURE (°C)

                                  FIGURE 7-14

                 Retention times  for hydrocarbons with the
                          acetone-washed Porapak QS
                                                                     100
                                     7-39

-------
lOO.Or
                                               1% OV-210 on
                                               PARAPAK OS
    40
50
60
90
100
                 70       80
                TEMPERATURE (°C)

                   FIGURE 7-15

Retention times for the primary sulfur compounds
            with OV-210 on Porapak QS
110
                                     7-40

-------
 100.0
                                    1%  OV-210 on
                                    PARAPAK QS
  10.0
LU
LU
CC
V)
                                             GH36H
   1.0
                           S02
   0.1
                                  _L
J_
     100      110       120       130       140
                                TEMPERATURE(°C)
         150
160
170
                                  FIGURE 7-15(a)
                                     7-41

-------
 100.0
                                               1%  OV-210 on

                                               PARAPAK QS
                                          Thiopene
                                                              Me9S.
  10.0
e

UJ

p


o
t—
0
LU
                        Me2S2
                                                       EtSH
   1.0
   0.1
     110       120       130      140       150

                                TEMPERATURE (°C)

                                    FIGURE 7-16
160
170
180
               Retention  times for the secondary sulfur compounds
                    with  OV-210 on acetone-washed  Porapak QS
                                       7-42 '

-------
 100.0r
                                       1% OV-210 on
                                       PARAPAK QS
  10.0-
Ul
Ul
or
     40
50
60
70       80
 TEMPERATURE(°C)
   FIGURE  7-17
90
100
no
               Retention times  for  hydrocarbons with  OV-210  on
                           acetone-washed  Porapak  QS
                                      7-43  ,

-------
compounds are  also  well  separated from the  secondary  S compounds,  indicating
that this column may be useful for H2S, COS, and methyl mercaptan.  Preliminary
examination of  Figure  7-16  suggests  that  this  column may have some  utility for
the separation  of  the  secondary group.   For example,  at 165°C the compounds
thiophene, n-butyl  mercaptan,  and dimethyl disulfide are separated. • However,
the isomers ethyl  mercaptan and dimethyl  sulfide are not separated, and it is
likely that  the similar  isomer pairs for propyl and  butyl  mercaptan would
similarly co-elute.   Further consideration indicates  that  there are several
additional possible S  compounds which should elute  between  ethyl  mercaptan and
dimethyl  disulfide  in  the figure.  These  include n-propyl mercaptan,  isopropyl
mercaptan, the iso-  and tert-butyl  mercaptans, and   the  various  methyl
thiophenes.    It thus   appears  that in order  to apply  this  column to  the
determination of the  secondary S species, one  would have to know beforehand
which species to expect.
     Comparison of  Figures  7-15  and  7-17  indicates that H2S is well separated
from the C2  and C3  hydrocarbons.   This suggests that for H2S in high  levels of
C2 or  C3 hydrocarbons,  the OV-210/Porapak QS  column  is  preferred  over the
untreated Porapak QS column.
     While this column might be useful for the determination of H2S, it was a
difficult column to prepare and stabilize, repeated large  injections  of H2S
being required  for  this  purpose.   Another undesirable  feature  of this  column
was that  the retention  times were  too  long to permit  routine,  repetitive
analyses  every 30 minutes, which was one of the criteria of this analysis.  For
these reasons as well  as its inability to separate COS and S02, this column was
not tested extensively with retort gas.
     Figures  7-18  to   7-20  illustrate the retention times obtained with  the
Chromosil 310 column.   Dimethyl disulfide and t-butyl mercaptan are not shown
                                     7-44

-------
  100.0r
                                              CHROMOSIL  310
  10.0
e

Ul
UJ
OC
Q
UJ
CO
=3
   1.0
                                                  CH3SH
                                                COS
   0.1
     30
40
50       60       70        80

         TEMPERATURE (°C )

          FIGURE  7-18
90
100
              Retention times for the primary sulfur  compounds with
                                  Chromesil 310
                                      7-45

-------
 100.0
  10.0
tu
3

I-


o
UJ
as
UJ
O

** 1.0
   0.1
     30
              40
                                                     TBuSH
                              CHROMOSIL 310
                                                   thiophene
50       60        70

        TEMPERATURE (°C)


            FIGURE 7-19
80
90
100
               Retention times  for the secondary  sulfur compounds
                                 with Chromosil  310
                                       7-46

-------
100.0
                                       CHROMOSIL 310
                                 Hexane
  0.1
    30
40
50
 60       70
TEMPERATURE (°C)
80
                                  FIGURE 7-20
             Retention times  for  hydrocarbons with Chromosil 310

-------
because  they eluted  too late,  over an  hour  at the  temperatures shown.
Figure 7-18  illustrates  that  most primary S compounds were separated with the
possible exception  of  COS and H2S.  Comparing Figures 7-18 and 7-19 indicates
that primary compounds are separated from the secondary group with the possible
exception of methyl  mercaptan and thiophene.  However, comparing Figures 7-18
and 7-20 indicates  that H2S falls between propane  and propene,  COS  co-elutes
with propane and ammonia, and S02 co-elutes with pentane.
     As with the  previous column it is not clear whether this column would be
useful for the secondary group of compounds until additional possible compounds
are considered.   In addition, hydrocarbon interferences  demand  consideration
before application  of  this  column to the primary group analysis.  However, on
this column COS elutes before H2S, a feature potentially helpful  when measuring
small  amounts of COS in large amounts of H2S.  For this reason, this column was
injected with actual  retort gas to evaluate its usefulness for COS.   However,
with the ratios  of  COS to H2S found in retort gas, the two peaks could not be
resolved.
     Besides its  inability  to achieve  the desired separation,  this column also
had other serious drawbacks.   Its temperature  limit (less than 70°C),  can only
be exceeded  occassionally.  Another  problem  is  its  sensitivity to water,  which
is abundant in retort gas.  (The support for this packing is a silica gel.)
     The next two columns to  be evaluated were the Carbopack B HT 100 and the
Carbopack B/1% XE 1.5% H3P04.   Of .these two  columns the latter packing is mbre
difficult to prepare  and, according  to preliminary  experiments,  did  not differ
enough from  the  former  column to warrant  a separate  investigation.   This
section therefore reports data only for the Carbopack B HT 100 column.
     Retention time data for this column are shown in Figures 7-21 to 7-23.  Of
the columns examined thus far, this column gave the best separation of primary
                                     7-48

-------
 100.0r
  10.0
E


UJ
LU
Ut
a:
=5
—3
o

•* 1.0
   0.1
                                   CARBOPACK BHT 100
                                 J_
                            _L
     30
40
50       60        70

         TEMPERATURE  (°C)

           FIGURE  7-21
80
                                                                CS,
90
                                                                      100
               Retention times  for the primary sulfur  compounds
                            with  Carbopack BHT 100
                                       7-49

-------
 100.0
                 llhiophenes
                                         CARBOPACK BHT 100
  10.0
ee
o
LU
CO
=3
a
   1.0
   O.T
     '40       50        60       70        80
                                TEMPERATURE (°C)
                                   FIGURE 7-22
90
100
110
              Retention times for  the secondary sulfur  compounds
                           with  Carbopack BHT 100
                                      7-50

-------
 100.0r
                                  CARBOPACK BHT100
  10.0
E


LU
O
H-

UJ
1—
ut
ce
                                                        Butane
   1.0
   0.1
                                                 Ethane
     30
40
50
80
90
                     60       70

                   TEMPERATURE (°C)

                        FIGURE 7-23

Retention times  for hydrocarbons with  Carbopack BHT 100
100
                                       7-51

-------
compounds.  The wide  separation  of COS and H2S  is  especially encouraging in
light of the large excess of H2S which is found in retort gas.  H2S essentially
co-elutes with the  C2 hydrocarbons,  although  this  is  not necessarily  a problem
in retort gas which contains high levels of H2S in the presence of small levels
of ethane and ethene.   S02 also elutes very close to the C3 hydrocarbons and in
the event that S02  is found in  retort  gas,  it would  be necessary to  consider
possible  quenching  effects on this  species.   Thiophenes,  and likely other
aromatic S  species, do not elute from  this  column  in less  than  one hour,  and
would therefore require  a different column.   The determination  of CS2 should
also be  approached cautiously with  this  column  because of the  proximity  of
dimethyl  sulfide.
     This column has also demonstrated other desirable characteristics, notably
ease of  packing,  a wide temperature range,  and tolerance  to water.   Water
tolerance was examined by injecting 10 mg of liquid water onto the column.   The
column was  "reconditioned"  by  temporarily raising  the column  temperature above
the boiling point of water.  When the temperature was again decreased to normal
operating range,  the   retention  times' of COS and H2S  were  observed  to have
changed less than  0.3%,  an insignificant amount.   Considering that this amount
of water would not normally be injected during the analysis of 1,000 retort gas
samples,   it was  concluded  that  this column possessed more than sufficient
tolerance towards  water.  Of  the  columns examined,  the  Carbopack B  HT 100
column is  clearly the  best suited  for the  determination of  the  primary  S
species in retort gas.
Application to Retort Gas
     The  final test of any analytical method  occurs  when it  is  applied to an
actual sample.  Various  columns  and  protocols  were  tested during operations  of
                                     7-52

-------
oil shale retorts at the Laramie Energy Technology Center.  Experiments at that



site  included:



      1.   A  test  of the acetone-washed Porapak QS column and protocol for the



          monitoring of H2S.  The objective of this effort was to determine the



          column longevity and stability, and to determine sampling problems.



      2.   Qualitative test of the remaining columns.  The objective during this



          period was to determine  which compounds could  be  observed with the



          columns of interest.



      3.   Quantitative monitoring of primary S species.



      4.   Quantitative  monitoring  of primary  S  species  in  support  of  the



          evaluation of a pi lot-scale venturi scrubber  during the May, 1982



          operation of the 150 ton retort.



These  tests  were  supported by the DOE (Contract Numbers DE-AS20-81LC10771 and



DE-AS20-81LC10845), but are mentioned in this report because of their relevance



to the  subject  at hand (Wallace and Sexton, 1982).  During the first test, it



was observed  that  H2S  could be  monitored  routinely with  the  Porapak QS  column.



Retention times were stable,  the flame in the FPD remained lit, and standards



run during the  period  of the  experiment varied less  than  10% relative once the



system was warmed  up.   These measurements were conducted with the valving and



column  arrangement  shown in Figure 7-1 and  described  in more detail in  the



Protocol section of this chapter.  Of particular importance was the observation



that  the column did not degrade even when exposed to uncooled (32°C) retort gas



saturated with  oils and water at that temperature  (Wallace,  1982).   The  main



problem  encountered during this period  was with  the  sampling system which



permitted fluctuations  in  the process  line  pressure  to affect the  pressure and



flow  of sample at the chromatograph.
                                     7-53

-------
     The results of  the qualitative tests have been  discussed in the column



evaluation section of  the  preceeding text.   In  summary only the  Carbopack B  HT



100 column was capable of separating the primary S compounds.  For most columns



the separation of COS from a large excess of H2S was especially difficult.



     The third experiment  was  conducted at the Low Void Volume  Retort at the



Laramie North  Site facility.   During this experiment the  retort  gas was



analyzed simultaneously for S species by a GC/MS and for total S with the total



S  analyzer  described  in  Chapter  6  of this report.   Major  species  and



hydrocarbons were  also  measured by a gas chromatograph,  data which permitted



the estimation of  quenching  effects whenever required.  The primary S species



were determined using the protocol described in the next section of this report



with a Carbopack B HT 100 column.   The  objective  of  this test was  to  compare



the results  obtained by the different  methods  to  determine the  efficacy of



each.



     The objective of  the  test carried  out  during  the operation  of  the 150 ton



retort during May 1982  was  to  provide monitoring data to determine  the



efficiency of a  venturi scrubber for the removal  of  H2S and other primary S



species.   This  provided an  opportunity to observe  the performance of  the



sampling and  analytical  system described below.  During this test,  the primary



sulfur species were  monitored  using the procedures described  in the Protocol



section of this chapter.



     Figure 7-24 shows  a chromatogram of retort gas obtained during this test,



and Table 7-2 describes the  detailed chromatographic  conditions  and integrator



routines.   Two injections  were made to  keep the compounds of interest within



the dynamic  range  of  the  detector.   The first was of 1 microliter for H2S



10 seconds before  the  integrator was started,  and  the second was of 100 micro-



liters 7:00 minutes later.   (Several changes in attentuation and chart speed
                                     7-54

-------
            o
            ro
O
^

d
            256
            ATTENUATION
                                               V)
                  FIGURE  7-24  •

Chromatogram of retort gas  sample:   6'  x

    Carbopack BHT 100 at 65°C  isothermal
1/8"
                    7-55

-------
                                   Table 7-2

           INTEGRATION AND VALVE SEQUENCING PROGRAMS FOR FIGURE 7-24

                    INTEGRATOR (HEWLETT PACKARD MODEL 3390)




Time (min.)              Function


   0.00                  Attenuation = 8
                         Chart speed =1.5
                          Peak width = 0.16 min.
                           Threshold = -1
                         Area reject = 500

   0.10                  Intg.  #5 (extend baseline horizontally)

   0.10                  Att 2t2 (attenuation = 4)

   1.20                  Chart speed

   5.00                  Disable horizontal baseline extension

   6.75                  Attenuation = 256
                         Chart speed = 1.5 cm/min

   7.39                  Intg.  #4 (disable automatic testing for solvent peak)

   7.87                  Attenuation =16

   8.75                  Chart speed =0.5 cm/min
                         Attenuation =0

   9.10                  Intg.  #2 set baseline at all valley points

  12.40                  Disable previous instruction

  14.00                  Chart speed =0.3 cm/min.
                                     7-56

-------
                              Table 7-2  (cont.)

                PROGRAM ON CHROMATOGRAPH (BASELINE MODEL 1030)


Item #
01
02
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
99

Time (min:
00:01
00:10
00:11
01:00
07:00
12:00
18:00
18: 01
29:45
00:30

sec) Code
13
23
24
. 14
03
04
23
24
99
00
CHROMATOGRAPHIC CONDITIONS
Operation
Inject 1 (jl sample onto
column 1
Start integrator at
11 seconds
Backflush column 1
Inject 100 nl sample
onto column 2
Backflush column 2
Stop integrator
Repeat every 30:00
minutes

Columns:                            Carbopack B HT 100, 6' x 1/8" OD Teflon
                                    2 each

Carrier flow rate:                  25 ml/min in each column, He

Column temperature:                 65°C

H2 flow to detector:                140 ml/min

Air flow to detector:               180 ml/min

Detector:                            Flame photometric operated in reverse mode
                                     7-57

-------
occur to preserve  the  visual  appearance.)   H2S,  COS,  methyl mercaptan,  and CS2
are plainly visible  in the figure and occur well  above the detection limit.
Identification of  these compounds was  confirmed on  site by  injection of
standards which yielded  identical  retention times.   Their identities are also
confirmed by the data  in Figures 7-21 and  7-22  which indicate an absence of
interfering compounds.   Were  it  present, S02 would  occur  in the window  between
COS and methyl mercaptan;  it  is  apparently  absent  in  appreciable  amounts.  The
peak labeled "CH3CH2SH?" was  not confirmed by the  injection  of standards on
site.   However, it  is  the  only known  compound  eluting during  this time  period,
according to the work  described  earlier in this report, and is therefore very
likely identified correctly in the figure.
     Figure 7-24 illustrates  that  COS and  to a lesser extent methyl mercaptan
elute over a sloping baseline due to H2S,  and both the latter compounds  must be
determined with a  tangent  skimming procedure.   For  the chromatogram shown»H2S,
COS, methyl mercaptan,  and CS2  occurred at concentrations of 3300, 62,  32 and
10 ppmv respectively,  and  should the  proportion  of  H2S increase significantly,
COS could not  be  determined under these chromatographic conditions.  Although
the separations during the May 1982 burn were conducted isothermally at  65°C,  a
better separation of H2S  and COS can be effected by  temperature  programming.
For example,  through temperature programming  between approximately 40°C and
120°C, the  separation  of  COS can be improved significantly using an otherwise
identical chromatographic  system (Wallace,  instruction manual  prepared  for the
Laramie  Energy  Technology Center, 1982).   However,  temperature  programming
requires a  considerable  increase in instrument cost and complexity compared to
isothermal  systems.  After due consideration of  the types of  samples expected,
the analysts must  therefore compromise between the better separation achieved
with temperature programming and the lower costs of isothermal separation.
                                     7-58

-------
     The sampling  system  which was used during  the  May 1982 test is shown in



Figure 7-25, which also illustrates the auxiliary gas supplies and a system for



generating and supplying calibration gas mixtures.  This system was designed to



provide a sample gas to the analyzers at a constant pressure and flow rate, and



to remove excess  water vapor and entrained material to prevent fouling of the



analytical   instruments.   While it  is  likely that the  system  shown  will  be



modified by  the analyst to meet  specific  requirements, it  is worthwhile  to



discuss briefly  the functions of  the  various  major components shown  in  the



figure in order to illustrate the requirements of a sampling system.



     Two sample conditioning  and  delivery  systems, one  for  the  inlet and the



other  for the  outlet of a hypothetical  treatment process, are shown  in  the



upper  left  of  Figure 7-25.   The  functions  of  the various components  can  be



illustrated by considering only  the top sampling  train:   the  sampling probe.,



PI, consists of a 3/8 inch stainless steel  tube which passes into the center of



the process  line  to avoid collecting  condensation which occurs on  the duct



walls.   The  first valve, VI,  is  included  to  permit the  remainder  of the



sampling system to be removed and leak checked without breaking the seal to the



process line.   The condensers consist of two stainless steel  vessels containing



glass wool  and  immersed in  an ice  bath.  Their  function is to remove excess



water vapor and most particulate  matter.  Additional filtering is provided by



filters HI and  H2.   All components discussed thus far are located next to the



process line to avoid  fouling the sample  line  which runs to the sampling



trailer.   During various  tests it was discovered  that  pressure  in the retort



gas process lines  often varied and sometimes became  sub-ambient, a  situation



which made it  impossible  to  rely  on the  process  line  pressure  to  force the gas



through the sample  line.   For this reason  a leakless,  aluminum-head sampling



pump, PI,  was included to provide a constant flow.  Valve V4 was included as an
                                     7-59

-------
      IM
      >>
     ^-
      ro
      c
      rcf

      CO

      O

     '£
      ITS
     CO
     OJ
     (8
     O)
      O
      Q.
      Q.
      3
      CO
    • CO
     •a
LO   S-
CM   (O
 i    -a
UJ   4->
a;   to
     as
     CD
     CD
     a.
     a.
     3
     CO

     •a

     ca
     o
     •o

     o
     o

-------
aid  in  leak checking the  downstream  portion  of the sampling system.   Check
valve V15  was  included  to prevent backwards  flow  during periods of negative
pressure in  the  process  line.   The back pressure  regulators  shown  consist  of
acrylic tubes  containing  a column of water through  which the sample  gas  must
pass before  exhausting to the atmosphere.   Although mechanical  back-pressure
regulators were  also  tested,  they did not prove  reliable.  Two  main  problems
became apparent  with  the  back pressure  regulators  shown  in the figure.  First,
if a vacuum  were inadvertently applied to the sample line, (e.g., due to  pump
failure),  the  water  in  the regulators would be pulled back through the entire
system.   This  problem was solved  by  including two  acrylic columns in  line,  the
upstream column  acting as a catch basin for  any  overflow.   Second, pressure
fluctuations in  the  process  line  still  affected the analyzers,  even  with the
pressure regulators  in place,  albeit to a lesser extent.  This  phenomenon was
further minimized by  including pressure regulator R9 and rotameter Fl for the
purpose of measuring  and  maintaining a constant flow  rate through  the  sample
line.                                           a
     In order  of operation,  the flow rates are first  set by  opening  valve  VI
with the pump  running.  With  valve V7 fully open,  valve  V5 is adjusted  to give
slightly more  than  the desired flow rate.   The  flow rate is   trimmed by
adjusting  regulator  R9 to cause a slight lowering  of the pressure,  and  further
adjusted with  valve  V7  to achieve the desired  flow  rate.   The system is  next
leak checked by  plugging  the  inlet  of  the  sample  probe.   The   system is
considered leak tight if no flow is  apparent at the flow meter Fl.
     If the  gas  chromatograph  is  connected directly to  the sample  line,  the
entire pressure drop occurs across the 1/16"  tubing which is contained therein.
With this  arrangement small  changes  in the sample  line pressure,  or small
changes  in the  resistance  of  portions of  the 1/16" tubing  cause  pressure
                                     7-61

-------
changes  in  the sample loop and, therefore,  changes  in the calibration of the



chromatograph.   Such  effects  are minimized by decreasing the flow through the



chromatograph  with  control  valve V30.   The flow rate should be set fast enough



to  sweep  out the sample delivery valves V17 through V20 and filter holder H5.



The  flow  through the chromatograph is monitored  by  a rotameter F8 and should



remain constant  for different samples and standards.



     The  sampling system  shown  in  Figure 7-25 was developed in response to the



practical exingencies  of  field  sampling, and certain  questions remain to be



addressed.   For  example,  "What  components are lost during the  cooling step,  at



which point  the  gases are exposed to an alkaline water solution?"  It is also



of  interest  to consider what fraction of the sulfur pollutants are present in



the  particulate as  opposed to  the' gaseous  phase in the  sample stream.



Potential methods for improving the  reliability and integrity of the sampling



method are presently under investigation.



     Figure 7-25 illustrates two approaches to providing standards, a mass flow



system  and  pre-mixed  gas  bottles.    The  former provides  a   range  of



concentrations to bracket  the sample  concentrations,  while the latter provides



a fixed  standard for  occasionally checking the operation of  the  analyzers.



This dual  arrangement is  convenient  when  operating  more than one type  of



analyzer, each on a different calibration schedule.   For  mass  flow controllers



with the  ranges  indicated  in the figure,  H2S  standards can be  generated in the



range 500-100,000 ppmv starting with  pure H2S.  For preparing standards for the



minor gases,  it  is  necessary to start with more dilute mixtures, typically in



the range 0.1-1.0% v/v.
                                     7-62

-------
PROTOCOL  FOR DETERMINATION  OF  HYDROGEN SULFIDE,  CARBONYL SULFIDE,  SULFUR
DIOXIDE, CARBON DISULFIDE, METHYL MERCAPTAN, AND ETHYL MERCAPTAN IN RETORT GAS

Principle '
     The above mentioned sulfur species, referred to hereafter as the primary S
species, are determined by gas chromatography with flame photometric detection.
The concentration  range of  interest  in retort gas is covered  by  using two
sample injection valves with different injection volumes.
Interferences
     Hydrocarbons,  which co-elute with  the S species of  interest,  alter the
fluorescent S signal  if present in excess.   For the procedure described herein,
this interference  is  addressed  by proper selection of column  and detector.   In
the case of  the  single flame detector  (SFPD)  the  operating mode also affects
the likelihood of interferences.
     Using the column  recommended  in  this  section, H2S co-elutes with ethane
and ethene.   However, with a one microliter injection volume,  1,000 ppmv of H2S
can be  determined  in 10% ethane without measurable error by  using  the single
flame detector in the reverse mode and by calibrating with peak height.  Higher
levels of ethane can be tolerated with a  dual  flame detector (DFPD).   If  the
sample volume is increased  to higher values to  detect  lower  levels  of H2S or
other minor  S species,  less ethane could be tolerated.   However,  with the
concentrations of  H2S  normally  found  in retort  gas, it is unlikely  that such
interferences would be a problem.
     With the  column recommended below,  S02 elutes very close to  the C3
hydrocarbons.   In  the  event that  S02  is detected  in  retort  gas  this
interference should  be  considered.   However,  as of this  writing, S02 has  not
been found in any retort gas of which the authors are aware.
                                     7-63

-------
     In  addition  to the above-listed  compounds,  it must be  recognized  that
there  are  numerous additional  S  compounds which  have a high enough  vapor
pressure to be  found  in  retort gas.   Listing  the  C2  to C4 mercaptans,  sulfides
and disulfides, in  addition  to the thiophene and  methyl  thiophenes,  one can
easily generate a  list of  20  such  compounds.  In  general, these  compounds will
elute  after the above-named  compounds.   However,  CS2 elutes close to dimethyl
sulfide, and the elution times of both compounds  should  be established with
standards.
Equipment
     1.   Gas  chromatograph.   The gas chromatograph should be 'equipped with  two
          gas  sampling valves  and  a  flame  photometric  detector.   The necessary
          arrangement of  valves and columns is shown in Figure 7-26.
               The  sample  injection  volumes  must  be selected  for  the
          concentrations  of S  species  encountered, and the injection  volumes
          should be changed on site should unexpected concentrations  be encoun-
          tered.   With a packed column, a  1 micro!iter injection  volume  covers
          the  range 500-20,000  ppmv,  which is adequate for monitoring H2S in
          retort gas from  most indirect  retorting processes.   A  50 micro!iter
          sample loop  is typically adequate  for  the range  10-200 ppmv, the
          concentrations  of minor  gases encountered  in the same  type  of gas.
          It is most  convenient if  the  sample  valves are  operated  from an
          automatic timer.
     2.   Integrator.   If  the separation  is  carried out isothermally,  Csee
          below)  it  is  essential  that  the  integrator  be  capable  of
          tangent-skimming COS  from the tale  of the H2S peak. Alternatively,
          the  integrator  can  be replaced  with  a  dual-pen,  dual-range strip
          chart recorder.  However, a peak integrator has  the advantages  of  a
                                     7-64

-------
CM
LU
Di
cu
      if)
      O)
      in
      to
      cn

     +J

      o
     4->
      CD
      to
      cu
     •r~'
      O
      QJ
      CX
      IO
      CO


      O»
      s.
      o
      s=
      o
      c.
      o
      (O


      cn
      o
      o
      cu
     •a
      c
      ca
     O
     O

-------
     wider dynamic  range,  automatic printout,  and programmable control  of
     the valves.                                             ;
3.   Columns.  Two  columns  are required,  one for each  injection valve.   A
     1/8" od X 6'  column  of  Carbopack B  HT 100 is adequate  for  most
     compounds, including H2S, COS, S02, methyl mercaptan, ethyl mercaptan
     and CS2.  Thiophene does not elute from this column in a reasonable
     time  and must be  determined with  a  different  column  (e.g.,
     Chromosil 310).  It is  not clear at this time whether later eluting
  <   compounds can  be  uniquely identified on the basis  of their retention
     time using a packed column.
4.   Detector.  A flame  photometric detector is required to  distinguish
     among the S species and the other numerous gases found in retort gas.
     Of  the  FPD's  available,  the dual flame  model  is least  prone  to
     interferences due to co-eluting hydrocarbons.  The single flame'model
     is more  prone  to  interferences, although it may  be  applicable for
     certain  types  of retort  gas.   (See previous  text.)  Hydrocarbon
     quenching effects in  the single flame  FPD  are minimized by reversing
     the  hydrogen  and  oxygen  flows  so that  the air  is introduced
     concentric to and interior to the flow of hydrogen.  However,  in this
     configuration  the  flame  is  often difficult if not  impossible to
     ignite.
5.   Mass Flow Controller.   Mass  flow controllers  are  needed for blending
     gas standards.   A  set of two controllers which operate in the range
     0.5-10.0  SCCM  plus  one  controller  in  the range 50-1,000  SCCM  are
     convenient.   Connect as shown in Figure 7-25.
                                7-66

-------
Standards
     Standards should  be  prepared which bracket the  concentrations  of the S
species  found  in the  retort gas.   This  is most easily achieved  by mixing
standards on site using a set of mass flow controllers.
     Calibrate each  of the  mass flow controllers against a volumetric standard
which is  traceable  to  an NBS standard.  The following procedure is applicable
to the  1,000  SCCM mass flow controller.   Calibrate  the stop watch against an
NBS time base which is available on most telephone exchanges.
     A dry test meter is required for calibrating the 1,000 SCCM channel, while
the 10  SCCM  channels require a small  bubble meter.   The following  procedure is
written in terms of the dry test meter, although the procedure is identical for
the 10  SCCM  channels with the  substitute  of the bubble meter in place of the
dry test meter:
     1.    Leak check.   Connect  a supply of  N2  to  the inlet of the mass flow
          controller and the dry test meter to the outlet.   Block the exit from
          the dry test  meter with a leak-tight  seal  and pressurize slightly
          with N2.   Adjust  the  mass  flow  controller to its  maximum  rating.
          (CAUTION:   Do not  exceed  the pressure rating of  the dry  test meter.)
          The mass  flow controller  should read zero  flow.   Back  off the
          regulator to  a  lower pressure.   The  pressure at  the regulator should
          remain constant.
     2.    Calibration.   Remove  any  restrictions from the exit of the dry test
          meter.   Set the flow rate on the  mass  flow controller and allow a
          reading to stabilize.   Determine the  volumetric  flow  rate  by
          measuring the time  required  for  an integral  number of  revolutions of
          the dry  test meter.   Adjust to  standard  conditions.   Repeat for
          several flow rates spanning the intended range of use.
                                     7-67

-------
     It is recommended that flow rate calibrations be conducted with the gas to
be monitored.  However, in the case of certain reactive gases such as H2S, this
is not  presently  possible with available equipment.   For example,  the  fluid in
a bubble  meter  absorbs a large percentage  of  the flow of H2S,  while dry test
meters are not  practical  at the low  flow rates  required for H2S.   For  such
gases, the mass  flow meter must be calibrated with  N2,  and then converted to
H2S using conversion factors  which are  calculated from  the molar weight and
heat capacity.
Procedure
     Typical  chromatographic conditions for an isothermal separation are listed
in Table  7-2.   However,  chromatographic  conditions  may need to be  adjusted
somewhat  to  take into account differences among samples.   In  particular,
separation of COS from the tail of H2S can be improved by starting the column
temperature at approximately ambient and increasing after the elution of methyl
mercaptan.
     Calibrate the chromatograph over the entire range of interest to determine
the linear  range of  the  system.   Plot  the square  root of the  peak height
against concentration.
     Inject a sample under identical  flow rate and pressure as the standard and
note the  peak height of  each component of interest.   Bracket the peak heights
of the sample by  the heights  of the standards.   Determine the concentration by
comparison to the calibration plot described in the previous paragraph.
REFERENCES
Bradey, S.S,  J.E.  Chaney.   1966.  J.  Gas. Chromat., 4:460.
De Souza, T.L.C., S.P. Bhatea.  1976.  Development of  Calibration and Moni-
     toring Systems  to Measure TRS and  S02  in  the PPB Range.  Presented  at the
     1976 Pittsburgh Conference.
                                     7-68

-------
Farwell, S.W.,  S.J. Cluck,  W. L.  Barnesberger,  T.M. Schutte, D.F. Adams.  1979.
     Determination  of  Sulfur  Containing Gases  by a  Deactivated Cryogenic
     Enrichment and Capillary Gas Chromatography System.  Anal.  Chem.,  51:609.

Gangwal, S.K.,  D.E. Wagoner.   1979.   Response  Correlation of  Low Molecular
     Weight  Sulfur Compounds  using  a Novel  Flame  Photometric Detector.
     J. Chromat. Science, 17:196.

Gilbert,  P.T.   1970.    "Non-Metals"   in  Analytical  Flame  Spectroscopy.
     R. Marrodineanu, ed.  Sprenger-Verlog, NY.

Goodfellow, L., M.T. Atwood.   1974.   Fischer Assay of Oil Shale  Procedures of
     The Oil  Shale Corp.  Proc. of the Seventh Oil Shale  Sym.   Golden,  CO.
     Colorado School of Mines, 69:205.

Lucero, D.P.,  J.W.  Palqug.   1973.   Monitoring  Sulfur Compounds  by Flame
     Photometry.  ASTM Special Tech.  Pub., 74:555.

Martin, R.L., J.A.  Grant.  1965.  Determination of Sulfur Compound Distribution
     in Petroleum  Samples  by Gas Chromatography with  a  Coulometric Detector.
     Anal.  Chem., 37:644.

Patterson,  P.L.  1978.   Dual  Flame  Photometric  Detector  for  Sulfur  and
     Phosphorus  Compounds  in  Gas  Chromatography  Effluents.   Anal.  Chem.,
     50:345.

Pearson, C.D., W.J. Mines.   1970.   Determination of Hydrogen  Sulfide, Carbonyl
     Sulfide, Carbon  Disulfide,  and Sulfur Dioxide  in Gases  and Hydrocarbon
     Streams by Gas Chromatography/FPD.  Anal.  Chem., 49:123.

Sklarew, D.S., J.S. Fruchter,  D.M.  Schoengold,  M. R.  Tompkins,  E. L.  Morris.
     1981.   Measurement of Sulfur Species in Offgas .from Rio Blanco1s Retort on
     Tract C-a Colorado.  Preliminary Report to DOE.

Stetter, J.R.,  J.M. Sedlak,  K.F. Blurton.   1977.   Electrochemical  Gas
     Chromatographic Detection  of Hydrogen  Sulfide at  PPM and  PPB  Levels.
     J. Chromatogr. Sci., 15:124.

Steven, R.K., A.E.  O'Keefe.  1978.  Modern Aspects of Air Pollution Monitoring.
     Anal.  Chem., 143A.

Stevens, R.K., J.D. Mulik, A.E. O'Keefe, K.J. Krost.  1971.  Gas Chromatography
     of Reactive  Sulfur Gases  in  the  Air  at the  Parts-per-Billion  Level.
     Anal.  Chem., 43:827.

Stuber, H.A., J.A.  Leenheer, D.S. Farrier.   1978.   Inorganic  Sulfur Species  in
     Wastewaters from in Situ  Oil  Shale Processing.  J.  Environ. Sci. Health.
     Part A,  A13:663-675.

Sugiyama, T.,  Y.  Suziki, T. Takeuchi.  1973.   Interferences  of  S2 Molecular
     Emission in a Flame Photometric Detector.   J.  Chromatography, 80-61-67.

Thompson, B.  undated.   Determination of Sulfur Compounds by Gas Chromatography.
     Varian Associates.
                                     7-69

-------
Von Lehmden,  J.D.   1978.   Suppression Effects of  Carbon  Dioxide in FPD Total
     Sulfur Air  Analyzers and  Recommended Corrective  Answer.   Joint Conf.
     Sensing Environ.  Pollutants, 4:360.

Walker, D.S. 1978.   Gas  Chromatographic  Determination of some Sulfur Gases at
     the Volume per Million Level in Air Using Tenax GC.  Analyst, 103:397.

Wallace, J.R.   1981.    The Analysis  of  Oil  Shale  Wastes:   A  Review.
     EPA-600/57-81-084.

Wallace, J.R., E. Sexton.  1982.   Evaluation  of a Gas  Chromatographic  Method
     for Monitoring  H2S  in  Retort Gas.    Report to  Laramie  Energy Research
     Institute.  See also Instruction  Manual  for Monitoring S  Species  During
     Test of a Stretford Unit.
                                     7-70

-------
                                   SECTION 8



                              CONCLUDING REMARKS







     In  addition  to the  tests  investigated explicitly during  this  program,



several  other  measurements have  been employed for  the  routine analysis of



retort effluents,  an  experience which has provided  worthwhile  information  on



many procedures.   While  such  information does not justify its own chapter,  it



is nevertheless helpful  to the analyst.   During the period of this investiga-



tion, information  on  additional methods  has also be described by contemporary



investigators.   The purpose of  this section, therefore,  is  to  summarize the



available  information  on  methods  of  analysis  for oil shale  effluents  which



should be important to the wastewater engineer.



     The pH  of  retort water is  determined almost  universally by application of



the pH electrode.   In the authors'  laboratory this  method is applied routinely



without major problems.   However,  certain procedural precautions are necessary



to obtain  the  best results.   First, the  glass  membrane  becomes fouled  easily



when working with oily waters  in general  and retort waters in particular, which



results in drifting and  inaccurate response.  (The  electrode response  can  be



restored by  following  the manufacturer's instructions for this  purpose, which



normally involves  washing the electrode  with a strong detergent.)  This means



that the calibration  and response  of  the electrode  must  be checked both before



and after  a  series of measurements with  at least two buffer  standards; a



degraded response  at  the  end of  the  series requires that all   analyses  be



repeated.  It should  also be  realized that the  pH of retort  waters is tempera-



ture dependent.   For  example,  the  pH of one set of retort  waters  examined



varied 0.024 pH units/°C.  While many  pH  meters   are  equipped with  a



"TEMPERATURE" control, this typically adjusts only the Nernstian slope and does
                                      8-1

-------
not compensate  for the effects discussed here.   Thus,  in order to obtain pH



values  which are  accurate  to ±0.1  pH  unit,  the temperature  should be



controlled to better than ± 4°C; in order for the reported pH to be meaningful,



the measurement temperature must also be reported.



     In  the  authors'  experience,  when these  precautions  are  taken  pH



measurements  on retort water are normally precise to ± 0.1 pH units, which is



the limit of^readibility for the pH meter in use.   While  the absolute accuracy



of this measurement  has not been established by  reference to an independent



method, it  is noteworthy that when ion balances were calculated on one set of



dilute samples  using  pH measurements so determined,  the  balances  were within



experimental error.  (See below.)



     Similar  comments  can be  made  regarding the  measurement of electrical



conductivity  (EC).  As with  the pH  electrode, the conductivity probe is easily



fouled and  needs  to  be cleaned periodically according  to the manufacturer's



instructions.  In  order to assure that the  cell  has  not  been fouled during a



series of measurements,  it is necessary to analyze a KC1  standard both before



and after and to  discard any  analyses  if the calibration has changed.   The



analyst should  also be  aware that the temperature coefficient for  the  EC



measurement  is different  for retort waters than  for  most surface  and ground



waters.  For  example,  for one set of  retort  waters  the  EC varied approximately



4%/°C, while the   conductivity  of most surface waters  varies approximately



2%/°C.   Many of the commercially available  conductivity  meters  are equipped



with a temperature compensation control which corrects  the conductivity 2%/°C,



which  would  obviously be  inappropriate for  retort waters.   It  is  therefore



recommended  that  retort waters  be  equilibrated  to a fixed  temperature,  say



25°C, before the EC is measured, and that this temperature be reported with the



conductivity results.   It should also be noted that the EC does not necessarily
                                      8-2

-------
vary linearly with concentration in high-ionic strength waters so that using EC



as an  indication  of  total  dissolved ions is not as accurate for retort waters



as for more dilute surface and ground waters.



     Alkalinity, which  is  defined as the  amount  of strong acid required  to



lower the pH to certain end points, is often interpreted in terms of the amount



of carbonate and  bicarbonate.   While  such  an  interpretation  is  usually  correct



for surface  and ground waters, it  is  incorrect for most  retort wastewaters



because of the  presence  of NH3, which consumes a portion of the acid titrant.



Examination  of  a  typical  titration  curve of an  oil  shale  wastewater



(Figure 8-1) indicates  the absence of  clear end points  and  emphasizes the



difficulty of determining  carbonate  species by this method.   Instead,  it  is



recommended that  inorganic carbon  (carbonate  + bicarbonate) be determined  by



the instrumental methods that are used for total organic carbon.



     Total inorganic  carbon  (TIC), which  in  retort waters is  equivalent  to



carbonate + bicarbonate,  is determined  instrumentally by  acidifying  the sample



and purging the resulting C02 into a detector.  Total carbon (TC) is determined



similarly by  combusting  or  rigorously  digesting the sample  to convert all



organic  and  inorganic carbon  to C02.   Commercially available  instruments



typically combust  the sample  in  an oxygen  stream or digest  it  in  strong



chemical oxidants; detection  is by coulometry, infra-red absorption, or flame



ionization after conversion to methane.   Several variations of these procedures



are available:  total  organic  carbon  (TOC) can be  determined  "indirectly"  by



measuring TC and  TIC  separately and calculating the difference, or "directly"



by acidifying  the sample  in  order  to remove the inorganic carbon  prior to



injection  into  the  instrument.  If  the  sample  is  filtered  through  a



0.45 micrometer filter  prior to  injection,  the  resulting  measurements are
                                      8-3

-------
CJ
cr>
              oo
p
ui
CD
irj
O
rt-
                                                                                                                       O
                                                                                                                       CO
                                                                                                                       O
                                                                                                                       to
                                                                                                                      p z
                                                                                                                         ! z
                                                                                                                          p
                                                                                                                          o

                                                                                                                      p
                                                                                                                      CO
                                                                                  • =5
                                                                                   CS
                                                                                                                          UJ
                                                                                                                          o
                                                                                                                                   ex

                                                                                                                                   (t3
                                                                                                                                   rtf
                                                                                                                                   £3
                                                                                                                                   S-
                                                                                                                                   O
                                                                                        O)
                                                                                        >

                                                                                        3
                                                                                        o

                                                                                        o
C3
evj
                                                          8-4

-------
referred  to as  dissolved  organic carbon  (DOC),  dissolved inorganic carbon



(DIG), and  dissolved total carbon (DTC).



     Although  TOC  and TIC  are important  measurements,  they have  not  been



addressed during the  experimental phase of this  study  because  of concurrent



investigations  being  carried  out at other laboratories.   In the  authors'



laboratory  TOC and TIC measurements  have  been carried out routinely in  the



support  of  various  pollution  control  programs,  and  the quality  control



procedures  applied during'these  tests  have provided some insight  into the



problems which  can occur  with these procedures.  For example, with an instru-



ment using an infra-red detector the reproducibility for the measurement of TIC



and TC  measurements for  retort waters analyzed  under  field  conditions was



approxiamtely  10%  relative.    Thus,  when  determining TOC  by  difference,  the



errors generated by taking the difference between two  large numbers can be



substantial.  Applying the  common formulas for propagation of error indicated



that for  retort waters  the error in  the TOC  measurement varied 15 to  100%,



depending on  the  relative  concentrations  of  TIC and TC.  During  this  same



investigation,  however, no  evidence  of analytical bias was observed  and  the



recovery of added  TIC  was 120%, which  is  reasonable for  the  precision  of the



technique used  (Habenicht et  a!., 1980).   TIC measurements  have  also  been



performed under similar conditions  by  coulometric titration with a  routine



precision at  1% relative (one a).   These  data illustrate the importance of



applying quality control  and  statistical  interpretation during  the determina-



tion of TOC  and TIC, and of reporting the precision of the results along with a



statement regarding the method by which the precision was determined.



     Others  who  have studied  the  determination of TOC and TIC more thoroughly



have  arrived   at similar  conclusions.   For  example,  an  interlaboratory



comparison  including  18 laboratories has  been carried  out using retort and
                                      8-5

-------
synfuel wastewaters  along with identical samples which  had been spiked with



known  quantities  of  TOC.   A variety of analyzers was applied, including those



with  infra-red,  coulometric,  and flame ionization detectors.   The results  from



this  study indicated that  there was  no  significant  difference between the



results obtained  with the various  types  of analyzers.   The  recovery  of the



spiked standards  was essentially 100%.  However,  those  analyzers equipped  with



coulometric detectors were  the most precise.  Standards  of known composition



were also  included  in this study to determine which laboratories were capable



of  measuring  TOC in  pure solutions at concentrations encountered  in  retort



waters, and the results of three laboratories were rejected on this basis.   The



results from  these  standards  also indicated that  many laboratories  had



difficulty quantitating high  level  samples.  Thus, those laboratories capable



of-analyzing pure samples were normally capable  of  analyzing retort waters.



These  investigators  thus  concluded  that "most of the problems associated with



the analysis  of these samples  are  due to technique and  not  the TOG method



itself,"  and  provided a  list of 9 suggestions  for best results  (Jackson,



personal  communcation,  1982).   These  included  suggestions  for  volumetric



dilution,   careful application of  quality  control   procedures  such  as



replications and  spikes,  vigorous  stirring, and practice with very high level



standards.



     In a  separate study,  Langlois  et al.   (1982) compared  the TOC  determina-



tions obtained with  two different oxidation processes, the  first consisting  of



high temperature oxidation in 02 and the second consisting of a photochemically



assisted  oxidation in persulfate  solution.   A coulometric finish was employed



in both cases.



     Of the 17  pure  compounds tested, 15  gave  equivalent results by  both



methods while two gave incomplete  recovery by the photochemically assisted
                                      8-6

-------
 procedure.   However,  for the 9 retort wastewaters  examined  equivalent results
 were  obtained,  indicating that the most refractory compounds were not signifi-
 cant  sources of error in retort water.  DOC was determined  both  by  difference
 and  directly,  and no bias between  the two methods  was observed.   However,  the
 direct  method was  the  more precise.   The precision of  these  analyses was
 approximately 1% relative (la).   Compared to the other finishes available, the
 coulometric  method  was  preferred by these authors  because of a wider dynamic
 range,  a higher upper limit,  and  more stable calibration.   In  summary,  the
 avail able'evidence  suggests that the existing methods for measuring  TOC and TIC
 in retort wastewaters  are adequate and that acceptable results  can be obtained
 by  considering  the guidelines mentioned  in  these paragraphs.    The  data
 discussed herein also  suggest that the coulometric titration is  the preferred
 finish.
     In the authors' opinion there  is not yet a proven method for  the determin-
 ation of  total  nitrogen  in  retort  water.   The  same  statement therefore applies
 to organic  nitrogen,  which  is  defined as the difference  between total and
 ammoniacal nitrogen.  This  deficiency  may be important because  organic bases
 are abundant  in  retort water,  and  it would be helpful to be able to establish
 their total  concentration as a quality  control  parameter.  Two  methods  are
presently in  use for the total  nitrogen  measurement:   (1) the  well-known
 Kjeldahl method, and (2)  combustion followed by  the chemiluminescent detection
of the  NO produced.  The problem  with  the  first method  is  that the more
 refractory compounds are incompletely digested  (although this  can  often  be
alleviated by the addition  of catalysts and the use  of higher temperatures),
and that the method  is  slow and cumbersome for field use.
     The second  method  was  investigated  during the  first phases of  this
project, and  was shown to give different  responses for different compounds
                                      8-7

-------
 (June, 1980  Progress  Report).   That is, the  conversion  efficiency to NO was



 compound  dependent,  especially for azo- and nitre-compounds.   Similar findings



 have  been reported in the literature for this method (Drushel ,  1977).  Whether



 or not this  is significant for retort waters  has not yet been determined.



      In addition to the tests which are performed for the purpose of  evaluating



 pollution control equipment, certain other tests are helpful to the analyst for



 the purpose  of checking  the  correctness and completeness  of the  individual



 determination.  One  such  procedure is  the  calculation  of the  ion  balance,  that



 is, the  electrical balance  between the anions and  cations which  have been



 determined.  Here the ion balance, B, is defined




               ZC ~ ZA
          R = ?
                  + Z
                    ZA


where lc  and IA  indicate the  absolute  values  of the cationic and  anionic



charges respectively.   Since  the true ion balance is  always  zero,  incorrect  or



incomplete analyses  are reflected in non-zero values for  B.   In practice the



major cation  (NH|)  and anions (COf,  HCOi) are  not measured  directly,  but are



calculated based  on  measurements of total  ammonical N, total  inorganic carbon,



and pH.   Thus, errors in any of these measurements result in non-zero balances.



     The principal difficulty  with  the ion balance calculation is due to the



buffering capacity of  retort  waters.   That is, a small  change in pH causes  a



large change  in  ionic  concentrations.  This problem can be  illustrated for  a



water containing  100 mM ammonical N and  45.84 mM  total inorganic carbon.   At a



pH of 9.25,  the  ion balance would  be 0.00, assuming  ideal solution  behavior.



However, if  the  pH  were measured  incorrectly  high by  0.1 pH units,  which
                                      8-8

-------
represents  a  reasonable error  during routine  analysis,  the calculated ion

concentrations would change as follows:

               NHJ    +    CO!    	>     NH3    +    HCOi

        pH = 9.25    50.00 mM    4.17 mM           50.00 mM    41.67 mM
        pH = 9.35    44.26 mM    5.13 mM           55.74 mM    40.71 mM

For a measured  pH of 9.35  the resulting  ion balance  would thus  be -14%.   Thus,

small errors in pH measurement thus contribute to large imbalances.

     A second precaution regarding the ion balance is related to the high ionic

strength of many  retort waters.   The calculations described  in the previous

paragraph are  strictly correct  only at  infinite  dilution and become  less

accurate as  the  ionic  strength  increases.   In theory, this  problem  can be

alleviated by simply  diluting the  sample before measuring the pH  which  is  used

in the  ion  balance calculation,  a procedure which  can result  in  a slightly

different pH than is obtained with an undiluted sample.  This is illustrated by

analyses performed  in the authors'  laboratory  on  a  set of 15  samples.   Ion

balances were normally within ±15% for samples  containing less than 30 meg/1  of

NH|.   For samples  containing  approximately  100  meg/1  of NHJ,  ion  balances  were

in error by approximately  80%.   However, when  the latter samples were diluted

and the pH of the diluted solution was used in  the calculation,  more reasonable

ion balances were achieved (Shaffron and Wallace,  1982).

     Although electrical conductivity is  often  used to check the determinations

of total ionic  species,  it is obviously subject to the same problems  inherent

in the ion  balance  calculation.  While both of  these  determinations are  useful

for retort  waters,  they are  obviously best applied to diluted samples.   A

measurement of  pH more accurate than the normal  ± 0.1 pH  units  would  also

improve the quality of these calculations.

     Table 8-1 summarizes  the recommendations  of  this  report for methods  of

chemical  analysis for oil  shale wastewaters and product gases.  Combusted gas


                                      8-9

-------
                                   Table 8-1

         RECOMMENDED PROCEDURES  FOR THE ANALYSIS OF OIL SHALE EFFLUENTS
 Species
        Recommended Methods
                                  WASTEWATERS
pH

Electrical conductivity

Total dissolved material

Sulfide (HS~ + S=)

Total ammoniacal N, (Na,K)c


Aqueous NH3

Inorganic C (HCOi + C0§)


Total organic carbon



Ion Balance


Total S
Anionic species:
S201 SCN~, NOi, SOI,
S0|, P0|-, NOi
Total S
Individual S species:
H2S, COS, CH3SH, CS2,  CH3CH2SH,
pH electrode

Conductivity cell

Freezing point depression

Pontiometric titration with Pb(II)

(1)  ion chromatography
(2)  modified electrode method

UV absorption of headspace

Evolution of C02 from acidified
sample; coulometric finish

Combustion or UV assisted chemical
oxidation to C02;
coulometric finish

Calculate based on pH of diluted
sample

Oxidation with H202 followed by
determination of SOI

Ion Chromatography
                                  RETORT GAS
thiophene
Continuous combustion followed
by measurement of S02

Gas chromatography with flame
photometric detector, using
procedures detailed in text.
  When using ion chromatography, Na and K can often be determined simultane-
  ously with NH|.   However, if NH^ need not be measured, more convenient
  methods are available for K and Na (Wallace, 1981).
                                     8-10

-------
streams  have  not been  treated because  of their similarity to  utility  and



industrial  stack gases which  have already  been  studied exhaustively.   For



information on additional methods, such as minor and trace elements, the reader



is  referred to the first  report  prepared for this project  (Wallace,  1981).



While these proposed  methods have been tested to  varying degrees with actual



retort samples, it must be realized that wider application will inevitably lead



to  new   information  and refinements.   The  authors  of this  report would



appreciate such information as it is developed by practitioners.



     In  conclusion, it  is  worthwhile to emphasize the  importance of quality



control  and quality assurance in applying these methods to oil shale effluents.



Although a  laboratory  may  have control charts and statistical interpretations



based on their  experience  with a variety  of surface  and  ground  waters,  these



data should  not necessarily  be  applied to  retort samples.   Statements of



precision and  accuracy should be based on  experience with  actual  retort



samples, not  on experience with  related  samples  or  on the  repeatibility  of



standard solutions.   In  order to  obtain the  best  estimate of the precision,



samples   should  be  repeated, not  sequentially,  but  spaced  at  intervals



throughout the day  in  order  to include  contributions  from instrument drift (at



least for stable species).   Standards  should also  be  run  both  before and after



a series of analyses  in order to be sure  that the instrument did not  change



during exposure  to  retort  samples.  It  is,  of course, recommended  that the



analyst   first  practice  with a  previously  characterized sample  whenever



possible.



     Because many of the species  of  interest in retort wastes  are  unstable, it



is  important  that  the  analyst  attempt to  establish  the  integrity  of the



sampling methods and not simply rely on published guidelines.  For this purpose



it  is recommended that  the sampling and.preservation  techniques  appearing in
                                     8-11

-------
the literature  be  a starting point,  but that decay studies  be an integral  part

of  any  sampling and analysis program.   If  the efficacy of the  sampling  and

preservation techniques  cannot  be established for  the  particular samples in

hand, it  is recommended  that analyses  be  completed immediately  on  site.

Finally, the  analytical   report  should include a  quality  assurance section

specifying not  only such parameters  as precision  and  recovery,  but the exact

method by which they were determined.

REFERENCES

Drushel, H.V.,  1977.   Determination  of  Nitrogen  in Petroleum Fractions  by
     Combustion with  Chemiluminescent Detection of Nitric Oxide  and Chem,
     49(7):932.

Habenicht C.H.,  A.  Jovanovich,  M.  Shaffron, J. Wallace, E. Hicks,  L. Liang,
     1980.   Steam  Stripping  and Reverse Osmosis for the Treatment of  Oil  Shale
     Wastewaters:   Report of a  Field  Test.   Report to  the  Laramie  Energy
     Technology Center (DOE) from the  Denver  Research Institute, Project
     5-31343,  November, 1980.

Longlois,  G.W.,  B.M^ Jones,  R.H.  Sakaji, 1982.  Coulometric  Quantitation of
     Carbon via UV-peroxydisulfate  or  High Temperature Oxidation.   Report
     prepared under US DOE Contract DE-AC03-765F00098.

Shaffron,  M., J.R.  Wallace,  1982.  Oil  Shale Wastewater Treatment for Transfer
     to  an  Open Pond.  Report  to  Laramie Energy Technology  Center prepared
     under Contract DE-AS20-81LC0775.
                                     8-22

-------
 I. HEPOR1
                               .  . TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
                            iL'ase read Imtrucnom on the .-fiivre tm'/tjre completing/
                                                         3. RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION NO.
  Methods of Chemical Analysis  for Oil  Shale Wastes
                                                         5. REPORT DATE
                                                         S. PERFORMING OHGAN1ZATI )N CODE
 7. AUTHQRtSI	—'	•	
  John Wallace, Linda A!den,  Francis  S.  Bonomo,
  John Nichols, Elizabeth  Sexton
             3. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NO.
  PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND AQORESS
  Denver Research  Institute
  Chemical and Materials  Sciences
  Univeristy of Denver
  Denver, CO  80208
             10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NO.
             1 1. CONTRACT/GRANT NO.
 12. SPONSC
                    ME AND ADDRESS
  Industrial Environmental Research  Laboratory
  Office of Research and Development
  Environmental Protection Agency
  Cincinnati, OH  45268
                                                         13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERED
             14. SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
 5. SUPPUE
 6. ABSTRACT        ——————______	___	               •
     Several methods of chemical  analysis  are described for oil shale wastewaters and
 •etort gases.  These methods are  designed  to  support the field testing of various
 'Dilution control systems.  As  such,  emphasis has been placed on methods which are
 apid and sufficiently rugged to  perform well under field conditions.  Ion chromato-
 raph has been developed as a=technique  for the minor non-carbonate inorganic anions
 n retort water, including S04, NOg,  S20~3, SOT, and total S.  Acetate, CT, N02, SOg
 nd P0|~ can be observed with this  technique  but cannot necessarily be separated if
 resent simultaneously^ The method recommended for sulfideis a potiometric titration
 1th Pb(II).  SCN", S20s, SCC,  CT, C03, NH3 , and OH" were shown to not interfere with
 his technique.  The freezing point depression  is used to determine the total solute
 ontent in retort waters, a test  which can be considered analogous to the standard
 esidue test.  Three methods are  described for the determination of total ammoniacal
 itrogen in retort wastewaters:   (1)  a modified ion selective electrode technique,
 2)  an optical absorption technique,  and (3)  an ion chromatographic technique.  The
 atter techlnque is recommended for routine monitoring of retort water, although the
 elative advantages of each are discussed  in  the report.   Total sulfur in retort gas
 s determined by combusting the gas in a continuously'flowing system, whereupon the
 esulting sulfur dioxide is determined by  S02monitor.   Individual  sulfur species in re
 ort gas including H7S, COS, S02,CS2, CH3CH7SH, and CH3CH?SH, are determined by gas  (C
                                            er)
                              KSY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANAUYSIS
                 DESCRIPTORS
 ossil  Fuels, Oil Shale pollution, chemical
 halysis,  chromatographic analysis, flame
 hotometry, gas analysis, spectroscopic
 nalysis,  volumetric analysis, water analy-
                                            b.IDENTIFIERS/OPEN ENDED TERMS
sulfate, thiosulfate, ni-
trate, thiocynate, total
sulfur, sulfide, residue
ammonia, hydrogen sulfidt
carbonyl sulfide, carbon
disulfide, methyl mercap-
tan, ethyl mercaptan, pH
                                            19. S6CUHI TY CLASS (Hill Repurt)
                                            70 SECURITY CLASS
                                                                      e. COSATI ficid/GfOup
NTIS Terms:

97F--Fuel Conver-
 sion
97R—Energy, envi-
 ronmental studies
99A—Analytical
 Chemisti
                                                                      21. NO. OF PAGES
                                                                      22. PRICE
EPA Form Z2;0-l :J

-------